Mercedes - CLA Coupe - Owners Manual - 2020 - 2020

CLA Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen‐ sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. Digital – on the Internet You can find the Operator's Man‐ ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐ page. Digital – as an app The Mercedes-Benz Guides app is available free-of-charge in familiar app stores. Apple® iOS É1185845402QËÍ 1185845402 Order no. P118 0186 13 Part no. 118 584 54 02 Edition C 2020 AndroidTM Mercedes-Benz Digital – in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con‐ tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi‐ media system (menu item "Vehi‐ cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. CLA Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger airbag warning Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐ out written permission from Daimler AG. ©Daimler Example & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front-passenger airbag is enabled If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled, a child on the front-passenger seat may be struck by the front-passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstrasse 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 18.04.2019 Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐ tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐ gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐ lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐ fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 1185845402 1185845402 2 Contents Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10 Indicator and warning lamps (Wide‐ screen Cockpit) ............................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20 General notes ............................................. Protecting the environment .......................... Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts ...................... Operator's Manual ........................................ Service and vehicle operation ...................... Operating safety ........................................... Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... Diagnostics connection ................................ 21 21 21 22 23 24 25 26 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... Correct use of the vehicle ............................. Problems with your vehicle ........................... Reporting safety defects ............................... Limited Warranty .......................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 31 Occupant safety ......................................... Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... Safely transporting children in the vehi‐ cle ................................................................ Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 33 33 35 40 47 Opening and closing .................................. SmartKey ...................................................... Doors ............................................................ Trunk ............................................................ Side windows ............................................... Sliding sunroof .............................................. 64 64 69 73 77 81 48 62 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 85 Seats and stowing ..................................... 89 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐ tion ............................................................... 89 Seats ............................................................ 90 Steering wheel .............................................. 95 Easy entry and exit feature ........................... 96 Operating the memory function .................... 97 Stowage areas .............................................. 99 Cup holder .................................................. 106 Sockets ....................................................... 108 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 110 Installing/removing the floor mats .............. 111 Light and visibility .................................... Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ............................................ Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Operating the sun visors ............................. 113 113 118 120 122 125 Contents 3 220 221 221 228 Maintenance and care ............................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ Engine compartment .................................. Cleaning and care ....................................... 384 384 385 390 Breakdown assistance ............................ Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) ......................................... Tow starting or towing away ........................ Electrical fuses ............................................ 400 400 402 407 413 418 Wheels and tires ...................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐ acteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................ Tire pressure ............................................... Loading the vehicle ..................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... Changing a wheel ....................................... Emergency spare wheel .............................. 422 Climate control ......................................... 126 Overview of climate control systems .......... 126 Operating the climate control system ......... 126 Overview of displays on the multifunc‐ tion display ................................................. Adjusting the instrument lighting ................ Menus and submenus ................................. Head-up Display ......................................... Driving and parking ................................. Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ Automatic transmission .............................. Function of 4MATIC .................................... Refueling .................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems ............. Vehicle towing instructions ......................... Voice Control System .............................. Notes on operating safety .......................... Operation ................................................... Using the Voice Control System effec‐ tively ........................................................... Essential voice commands ......................... 229 229 230 MBUX multimedia system ....................... Overview and operation .............................. System settings .......................................... Navigation .................................................. Telephone ................................................... Online and Internet functions ..................... Media ......................................................... Radio .......................................................... Sound ......................................................... 247 247 281 290 330 358 365 372 380 Instrument Display and on-board computer ................................................... Instrument Display overview ....................... Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... Operating the on-board computer ............... Adjusting the design of the Instrument Display ........................................................ Showing display content on the instru‐ ment cluster ................................................ 130 130 139 142 147 148 150 159 214 215 215 216 217 218 219 232 233 422 422 423 424 431 435 440 443 452 4 Contents Technical data .......................................... Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ..................................... Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ Operating fluids .......................................... Vehicle data ................................................ 456 456 456 458 459 466 Display messages and warning/indi‐ cator lamps .............................................. 468 Display messages ....................................... 468 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 515 Index ......................................................... 530 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐ lowing symbols: & DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi‐ ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐ ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % Useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. Instruction X (Q page) Further information on a topic Information on the multifunction dis‐ Display play/media display + Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system * Corresponding submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia sys‐ tem * Marks a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit Left-hand drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 144 E Calls up navigation → 290 2 Combination switch → 114 F Calls up the radio → 373 3 Instrument Display → 215 Calls up media 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 142 5 Start/stop button → 131 → 368 G Calls up the telephone → 332 H Calls up favorites → 268 260 → 138 I Calls up vehicle functions → → 250 J Active Parking Assist → 201 7 Climate control systems → 126 K DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 140 8 Hazard warning lights → 115 L Touchpad → 250 9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp → 45 → 216 A Glove box → 100 M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ tem B Stowage compartment → 100 N Adjusts the steering wheel → 95 C Cup holder → 106 On-board computer → 216 Cruise control → 171 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 174 → 26 ECO start/stop function 6 Media display D Control knob for: Volume and switching sound on/off → 247 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 247 O Control panel: P Diagnostics connection 7 8 At a glance – Cockpit Q Opens the hood → 385 R Electric parking brake → 156 S Light switch → 113 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Instrument Display (standard) At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 1 ! ABS malfunction → 525 B ; Check Engine → 519 2 #! Turn signal light → 114 C R Rear fog light → 114 3 h Tire pressure monitor → 528 D K High beam → 114 4 Speedometer → 215 L Low beam → 113 5 Multifunction display → 220 T Parking lamps → 113 6 # Electrical malfunction → 519 → 525 7 L Distance warning → 524 → 525 8 Brakes (red) → 522 → 517 H æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator → 519 I Ù Electric power steering malfunction → 518 J ü Seat belt not fastened → 517 $ USA only J Canada only → 522 A Electric parking brake applied (red) → 522 ! Canada only ÷ ESP® F 6 Restraint system G Fuel level indicator 9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) F USA only E å ESP® OFF 11 12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit) Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit) 1 Speedometer → 215 E ! ABS malfunction → 525 2 #! Turn signal light → 114 F Ù Electric power steering malfunction → 518 3 Multifunction display → 220 G h Tire pressure monitor → 528 4 6 Restraint system → 517 H % This indicator lamp has no function 5 Tachometer → 215 → 519 → 525 I æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator → 525 7 R Rear fog light → 114 → 522 8 K High beam → 114 L Low beam → 113 T Parking lamps → 113 L ü Seat belt not fastened → 517 → 519 M Brakes (red) → 522 A Coolant temperature display → 215 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 522 C # Electrical malfunction → 519 → 519 D L Distance warning → 524 6 å ESP® ÷ ESP® OFF 9 ÿ Coolant too hot/cold J Fuel level indicator K Electric parking brake applied (red) F USA only ! Canada only $ USA only J Canada only N ; Check Engine O ä This indicator lamp has no function 13 14 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors → 125 2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 118 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐ trol on/off → 4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 118 7 ; me button → 351 118 8 G SOS button → 351 → 118 9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 81 → 118 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 81 → 123 A Inside rearview mirror 15 16 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 1 Operates the memory function → 97 B Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 62 2 Adjusts the seats electrically → 90 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 77 3 Switches the seat heating on/off → 93 D W Opens/closes the left side window → 77 4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 94 E Adjusts the head restraints → 91 5 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 69 F Configures the seat settings → 93 6 Opens the door → 69 G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 90 7 Opens the trunk lid → 73 H Adjusts the seat height → 90 8 Operates the outside mirrors → 122 I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 90 9 W Opens/closes the right side window → 77 J Sets the seat fore-and-aft position → 90 A W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐ dow → 77 K Adjusts the seat cushion length → 90 17 18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 Safety vests → 400 9 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 28 2 me button and SOS button → 351 A Tow-starting and towing away → 414 3 Hazard warning lights → 115 B TIREFIT kit → 403 4 Stowage compartment for customer literature → 101 C First-aid kit (soft sided) → 401 5 Starting assistance → 411 → 148 6 Checking and refilling operating fluids → 459 7 Tow-starting and towing away → 414 D Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card 8 Flat tire → 402 E Warning triangle → 401 19 20 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Õ R R R R R R The Digital Operator's Manual describes the function and operation of: R The vehicle R The multimedia system # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: Search: search for keywords in order to find quick answers to questions about the opera‐ tion of the vehicle. Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐ ting up your vehicle. Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the instrument dis‐ play. Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks. Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be opened and closed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold‐ ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system: Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster. Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for con‐ tents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual is deactivated while driving. % The Operator's Manual can also be found in the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐ mon app stores. General notes Protecting the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi‐ ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ ute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style. 21 Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐ lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ nents and parts from Daimler AG. 22 General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have aftermarket installation of acces‐ sories carried out at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐ vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐ cially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐ vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 458) when ordering MercedesBenz Genuine Parts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐ ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐ cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. General notes The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐ cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R the fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author‐ ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to one of the following address: in the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 in Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 23 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐ ment wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐ sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐ ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer 24 General notes Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Possible danger due to substances hazard‐ ous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ functions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. # Always have the prescribed service/ maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of incorrect modifications to electronic component parts Modification to electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com‐ ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, they may no longer function as intended and/or endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ tronic component parts or their soft‐ ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐ side. General notes # # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ mable material. If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐ hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or chassis components In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐ mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐ cle components USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐ ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference 25 received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐ lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interfer‐ ence that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐ ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany 26 General notes Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ nection If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐ cle could be affected. # Only connect the vehicle diagnostics connection to devices which have been tested with regard to their use and are considered safe. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐ nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐ mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐ rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐ cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter: R safety-relevant works R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and conversions R work on electronic components General notes Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐ ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐ fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐ faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐ essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐ eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the 27 "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA), go to https://www.safercar.gov or write to Adminis‐ trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW, Wash‐ ington, DC 20590, USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov 28 General notes Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc‐ tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat‐ ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐ cle damage. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐ cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe operation of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment functions, which are also made possible by electronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle's operat‐ ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunc‐ tions. In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as: R Operating status of system components (e.g. fill levels, battery status, tire pressure) R Status messages concerning the vehicle or its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐ eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐ tened seat belts) R Malfunctions or faults in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) R Information on events leading to vehicle damage R System reactions in special driving situations (e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐ bility control systems) R Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐ mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this General notes data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐ work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐ ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services include repair services, maintenance processes, warranty claims and quality assur‐ ance measures, for example. The read out is per‐ formed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties collect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in finding malfunctions and improving quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer, if necessary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this, the manu‐ facturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle convenience and info‐ tainment functions yourself. This includes, for example: R Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to third parties only at your request, par‐ ticularly when you use online services in accord‐ ance with the settings that you have selected. You can store or change convenience settings/ individualization in the vehicle at any time. 29 Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example: R Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ tions R Suspension and climate control settings R Customizations such as interior lighting If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control this by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐ tain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include: R General vehicle data R Position data This allows you to use selected apps on your smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐ back. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐ cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of 30 General notes further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐ tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐ cific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐ less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐ cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐ nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv‐ ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐ ufacturer or other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding online services of the manufacturer, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator's Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with the relevant data protection information. Per‐ sonal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐ cessed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐ ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, please ask the service provider for information about the type, extent and pur‐ pose of the collection and use of personal data when services are provided by third parties. MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐ media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐ tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐ tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐ nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to General notes vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐ out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐ see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. 31 Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐ ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐ tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyright Free and open-source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource 32 General notes Registered trademarks R Bluetooth® R R R R R R R R R is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth SIG Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg‐ istered trademarks of Daimler AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐ tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corporation. R R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis‐ tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. Occupant safety Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com‐ ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐ cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐ tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐ pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com‐ pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. 33 Reduced restraint system protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death from modifications to the restraint system The restraint system can no longer function correctly after alterations have been made. The restraint system may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐ modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). 34 Occupant safety Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐ tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐ tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tions in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig‐ gered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air‐ bags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐ sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐ ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Occupant safety The components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: Component Detected deploy‐ ment situation Emergency Tension‐ ing Devices Frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag Frontal impact Knee airbag Frontal impact Side airbag Side impact Window curtain air‐ bag Side impact, rollover, frontal impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz‐ ardous to health but may cause short-term 35 breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro‐ tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. 36 Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor‐ rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 89). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐ vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐ cle occupant must observe the following infor‐ mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R R R R R R R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐ ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ ted, abrasive or fragile objects. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 99). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 54). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 49). Occupant safety Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ ple. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoul‐ der. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller build Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ tem. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐ fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R R 37 The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. # Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐ rages or seat belt retractors. # Make sure that the seat belts are not damaged, are not worn and are clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that are approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. 38 Occupant safety The sports seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you install another multi‐ point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection as intended. Depending on the seat model, there may be an opening in the seat backrest. These openings have no function. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modified seat belt systems If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. # Only use the standard three-point seat belt. # Never modify the seat belt system. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐ sioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera‐ tional and are unable to perform their inten‐ ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐ ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Fastening seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ not be pulled out any further. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ responding seat. Occupant safety Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐ bag shutoff: * NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff: * NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the frontpassenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied frontpassenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer‐ tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐ tem (/ page 39). Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. 39 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐ ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐ pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. 40 Occupant safety In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Airbags Overview of airbags 1 Driver's knee bag 2 Driver's airbag 3 4 5 6 Front passenger airbag Front passenger knee airbag Window curtain airbag Side airbag The installation location of an airbag can be rec‐ ognized by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection from each airbag: AIRBAG Potential protection for: Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag Head and ribcage Window curtain airbag Head Side airbag Ribcage and pelvis Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front-passenger airbag is enabled If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled, a child on the front-passenger seat may be struck by the front-passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 59). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐ bag shutoff: Occupant safety The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45). * NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # # Stow objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Protection by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ tective function and deployment may even cause further injuries. In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R R # 41 Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. Observe the following information. Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa‐ tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 89). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may 42 R R R Occupant safety otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ ment area of the airbag. If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 49). Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow‐ ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air‐ bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the R deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side wall trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐ ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection provided by airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the airbag cover If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 40). & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐ vent the deployment of air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, operation of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff may be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tions of the sensors in the door paneling Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per‐ formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐ ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to Occupant safety the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer has a protective function and cannot protect as intended in the event of an accident. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ tem. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐ tioned correctly (/ page 48). R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R R 43 The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐ tion and the head restraint setting accord‐ ingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func‐ tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. This could result in the front passenger air‐ bag not functioning as intended during an accident. # Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system. 44 # # # Occupant safety The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi‐ ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 35). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example in the following situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐ face. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to deactivated front passenger airbag If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐ bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R R # The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. The person is seated correctly. Ensure, both before and during the jour‐ ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐ sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 45). Occupant safety Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐ tor lamps Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐ played after the self-test: R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐ ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 45 Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ tinuously. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger front airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air‐ bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 46 Occupant safety NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 59). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and you position the front passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi‐ cle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐ der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐ tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from # the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint sys‐ tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐ tions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 59). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person Occupant safety R with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the result of the classification. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per‐ son of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag cannot perform its intended protective func‐ tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger air bag is enabled or deactivated in accordance with the per‐ son in the front passenger seat. R R 47 The person is seated properly with a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 59). PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec‐ tion) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. 48 R R R Occupant safety Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with memory function: Move the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐ media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ tective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your‐ self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is can‐ celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐ lowing situations: R when backing up The system will not initiate any braking applica‐ tion in the following situations: R whilst driving or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog‐ nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐ dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 49). Occupant safety Be diligent Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in the child restraint system may have serious con‐ sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri‐ ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐ ling a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐ dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Generic term "child restraint system" The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐ tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observing laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. 49 Observing standards for child restraint sys‐ tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐ ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐ lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets R The vehicle's seat belt system 50 R Occupant safety The Top Tether anchorages Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐ tem (/ page 54). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be fitted properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐ site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐ vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system cor‐ rectly & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by incorrect installation of the child restraint system If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed on a suitable seating position, it cannot perform its intended protective func‐ tion. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. # Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # # # # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐ ions. Always use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is not correctly installed or secured, it could release in the event of an accident, sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. Occupant safety # R Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 54). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 58). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 60). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 59). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour‐ ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐ rent situation (/ page 45). R R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. Do not modify the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system may no longer function as it is supposed to if you make modifications or attach objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable accessories. This poses an increased risk of injury! Never modify the child restraint system. Only attach accessories which the manufacturer of the child restraint system has authorized especially for this child restraint system. 51 Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ tems that have been subjected to a load in an accident may then not be able to perform their intended protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. # Always replace child restraint systems immediately that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. 52 Occupant safety Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect it with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people – particularly children – are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ dren – unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. Occupant safety 53 Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint systems Vehicle seat Left/right rear seat Front passenger seat Center rear seat Favored securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing sys‐ tem ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56) Securing system: R Vehicle seat belt Securing system: R Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 56) Alternative securing system: Vehicle seat belt R Be sure to observe: If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 45). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shut‐ off (/ page 43). R 54 Occupant safety Activating/deactivating the seat belt's spe‐ cial seatbelt retractor & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The child seat safety feature is deactivated and the seat belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel. It is therefore not possible to engage the seat belt again. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Activate the child seat safety feature again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats # # # # # # To install a child restraint system: when installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the informa‐ tion in this Operator's Manual. Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. To activate the special seatbelt retractor: pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seatbelt retractor is activa‐ ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound. Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. To deactivate the special seatbelt retrac‐ tor: press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐ wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. Occupant safety R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐ partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys‐ tems in which the child is secured using the integrated seat belt in the child restraint sys‐ tem, the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is 73 lb (33 kg). If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated seat belt does not offer suffi‐ cient protection. An excessive load may be placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachments and the child may not be restrained in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ tem together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system that secures the child with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present 55 Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not come into contact with the front seat. If neces‐ sary, move the front seat forward slightly. ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow‐ ing: O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat and a Group I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. 56 Occupant safety O When using a Group I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat. Once the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints imme‐ diately and adjust them correctly. O For certain child restraint systems in weight group II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐ ble contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be ten‐ sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐ ion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. * NOTE Be careful not to damage the seat belt for the center seat when installing the child restraint system # # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. Securing a Top Tether 1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐ cle. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after installing Top Tether belts If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐ dent or during braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can Occupant safety 57 also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. # Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock verification indicator. If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top Tether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCHtype (ISOFIX) and the vehicle. # # # # # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 92). Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐ lation instructions when doing so. # # # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐ lation instructions when doing so. Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐ wards (/ page 92). Make sure that you do 58 Occupant safety not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐ wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R # Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐ partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. O Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. If the center seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat and a category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: O O O adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. When using a category I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints imme‐ diately and adjust them correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. Occupant safety O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 54). # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger front airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air‐ bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 59 NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 60). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐ tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 45). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐ bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. 60 Occupant safety Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation and operating instruc‐ tions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints imme‐ diately and adjust them correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be ten‐ sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐ ion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. O Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor function ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 54). # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. # Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the # # # # highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly. Occupant safety Child safety locks # Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people – particularly children – are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ dren – unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. 61 & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example # # # Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear passenger compartment side win‐ dows. 62 Occupant safety The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear passenger compartment side win‐ dow can be opened or closed in the following cases: R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch on the driver's door. R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driv‐ er's door. Notes on pets in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐ tended in the vehicle # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Occupant safety R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuver and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. # Always correctly secure animals while driving, for example using a suitable animal carrier. 63 64 Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields # Keep the key away from strong mag‐ netic fields. % The SmartKey may vary from the one shown in the image, depending on the vehicle equipment. 1 2 3 4 5 Locks Indicator lamp Unlocks Opens the trunk lid Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the Ü or ß button, the bat‐ tery is discharged. Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 66). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R The doors R The fuel filler flap Opening and closing R The trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is activated again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐ tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. Indicator lamp of the vehicle lock 65 Indicator lamp 1 in the trim on the driver's side flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside. Indicator lamp 1 remains off if the vehicle is locked from inside or while the vehicle is in motion. Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements: R The ignition is switched off. % The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. # # To activate: press button 1 for approx‐ imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit (the SmartKey is inside the vehicle). Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R 66 Opening and closing To switch between settings: press the Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. # To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ Key. % When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space of the center con‐ sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐ cally activated (/ page 132). # Removing/inserting the emergency key Replacing the SmartKey battery & DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Deactivating the SmartKey functions If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the ß button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once. Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2. # To insert: press release knob 1. # Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # # # To remove: press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position. Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Opening and closing + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental # Remove the emergency key (/ page 66). # Press release knob 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery. Insert the new battery into battery compart‐ ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat‐ tery when doing this. Push in battery compartment 3. damage caused by improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. # # # # # Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. 67 68 Opening and closing Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. R Possible causes: The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. R The SmartKey is faulty. # # # You have lost a SmartKey. # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 66). Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 66). Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. Opening and closing Doors Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 69 The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐ LESS-GO. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐ LESS-GO Requirements: The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed. R # # # To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 1. To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ dle again. # # To unlock: press button 1. To lock: press button 2. The indicator lamp in the button on the driv‐ er's or front passenger door lights up. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. 70 Opening and closing If you open the trunk lid from outside, the trunk lid is automatically unlocked. To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐ face of the door handle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐ sor surface 2 until the closing process has been completed. % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 79). # Opening and closing Problems with KEYLESS-GO Problem You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Possible causes: The SmartKey functions have been deactivated (/ page 66). R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. R The SmartKey is faulty. R # # # # Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66). Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 66). Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 66). Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐ ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐ ing faster than walking pace. 71 72 Opening and closing In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/ pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐ mometer. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key # # To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. When the vehicle is locked automatically, the indicator lamp in button 2 lights up. Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐ er's door using the emergency key. # # # # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover. Pull and hold the door handle. Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. Release the door handle. Opening and closing Locking the front passenger door and rear doors with the emergency key # 73 To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from outside. Trunk Opening the trunk lid & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning # # # To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1. To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1. Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐ der until it engages and is seated firmly. # # Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock. To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. 74 Opening and closing * NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta‐ cles above the vehicle The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐ cient clearance above the trunk lid. You have the following options for opening the trunk lid: # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75). With the trunk lid unlocked, press the top of Mercedes star 2. % To open, pull on the folded-out Mercedes star when the rear view camera is activated. # # # Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1. Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. Closing the trunk lid & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. Opening and closing There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. HANDS-FREE ACCESS function 75 & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. You have the following options for closing the trunk lid: # Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han‐ dle recess and push it closed. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid R R With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the trunk lid by performing a kicking movement under the bumper. Observe the notes when opening the trunk lid (/ page 73). # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the SmartKey located is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle in such situations. When making the kicking movement, make sure that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐ wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice. 76 Opening and closing Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ thetic leg. The trunk lid could be opened unintentionally, in the following situations: R If a person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R If objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R If a protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R If the protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations. Unlocking the trunk from inside with the emergency release Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged. Opening and closing Side windows Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. # Press the emergency release button 1 briefly. The trunk lid will unlock and open. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # 77 If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper‐ ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. 78 Opening and closing # To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐ dows can continue being operated. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. 1 Closes 2 Opens The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐ dence. # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. Automatic reversing function of the side win‐ dows If an object blocks a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R During resetting This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Opening and closing # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐ ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by inadvertent convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ dow and the sliding sunroof. # Observe the complete closing proce‐ dure when using convenience closing. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # # Press and hold the ß button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed. To interrupt convenience closing: release the ß button. 79 To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the ß button again. % Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 69). # Problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature will then not be active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. 80 Opening and closing Problem A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function. # The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace it if necessary (/ page 66). # Opening and closing Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the sliding sunroof During opening and closing, parts of the body could get caught in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. # When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop‐ ped. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ dren # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. * NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and ice & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the roller sun blind Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of the sliding sunroof. # Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts become trapped between the roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun‐ roof. # When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun blind. # Press the button in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop‐ ped. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. 81 82 Opening and closing # * NOTE Important points to remember when a roof rack is installed When a roof rack is installed, raising or open‐ ing the sliding sunroof may be limited. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof rack is installed. # If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. # # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof rack is instal‐ led. To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop‐ ped. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised. 1 Raises 2 Opens 3 Closes/lowers Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐ stitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of entrapment even with the reversing function active The reversing feature does not react in par‐ ticular: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R Over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing path R During resetting This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process is stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur‐ ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers‐ ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing feature In particular, the reversing feature does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent entrapment in these situations. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. 83 or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐ ing". Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is automatically lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it is automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it is raised again automatically. 84 Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐ matic lowering of the sliding sunroof At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. Problem The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. # # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for‐ wards or backwards. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. Problems with the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased force. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: Opening and closing Problem 85 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐ ance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly: Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. # Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not operate smoothly. # # # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed. Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened 86 R R R R Opening and closing When the trunk lid is opened When the hood is opened When the interior motion sensor is triggered (/ page 87) When the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 87) R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 132) % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐ matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 356). % In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐ tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐ Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, ß or p button on the SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space (/ page 132) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO Grasp the outside door handle with the SmartKey outside the vehicle. # Opening and closing Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐ lowing components are closed: R The doors R The trunk lid The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐ ted: R After pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 132) R R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on detecting damage on a parked vehicle (/ page 158). Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐ ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm. 87 Function of the interior motion sensor % This function may not be available in all countries. When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐ ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐ cally after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R the doors R the trunk lid The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐ tivated: R after pressing the Ü or p button on the SmartKey R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 132) 88 R R Opening and closing after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐ cle interior R when the side window is open R when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor. Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion 89 Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instru‐ ment cluster clearly You have a good overview of the traffic con‐ ditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoul‐ der and across your hips in the pelvic area 90 Seats and stowing Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package) # # # # # # To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached. To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. Adjusting the front seat electrically 1 2 3 4 Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat fore-and-aft position # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 97). Seats and stowing Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # 1 2 3 4 Raise Soften Lower Harden # Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back. Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. 91 & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐ not provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. 92 Seats and stowing For vehicles with sports seats, it is not possible to adjust the front head restraints. # To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards. Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically For vehicles with sports seats, it is not possible to adjust the outer head restraints. # # # To raise: pull the head restraint up. To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐ tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. To move forwards: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forwards. # To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press the release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down. Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints Removing Seats and stowing # # # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for‐ wards slightly (/ page 101). Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Installing Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. # Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # # Select the settings Z for the desired seat. Adjust the air cushions. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat. # Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High Intensity on or off. Select ß for the desired seat. The settings for the selected seat are reset. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera‐ ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort # Select Reset. # 93 5 Seat Comfort 94 Seats and stowing To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. # * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, over‐ heating may occur due to objects or docu‐ ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐ ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu‐ ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. # To switch on/increase the level: press but‐ ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. Seats and stowing # To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐ tion level is set. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐ tion is switched off. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # To switch on/increase the level: press but‐ ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐ tion level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. 95 96 Seats and stowing Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when driving off while adjusting the easy exit feature ‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ ess is complete before driving off. # # # # Push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. The steering column is unlocked. Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked. Check and make sure that the steering col‐ umn is locked by moving the steering wheel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while adjusting the easy entry and exit feature # Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occu‐ pants – particularly children – could become trapped. Seats and stowing # During the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process is stopped. You can stop the adjustment process by press‐ ing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu‐ larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's door open R You open the driver's door with the ignition switched off % The driver's seat will move backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost position. The seat backrest will move forwards only if it is not already in the foremost position. The driver's seat will move back to the last drive position when: R You switch the ignition on with the driver's door closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on 97 The last drive position will be stored when: You switch the ignition off R You call up the seat settings via the memory function R You save the seat setting using the memory function R Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 AUTO. SEAT ADJUSTMENT 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function. Operating the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv‐ er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. 98 # Seats and stowing Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ ary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ ting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the setting procedure of the memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel. # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐ ately release the memory function posi‐ tion button. The adjustment process is stopped. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The memory function can be used when the igni‐ tion is switched off. Storing Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. The following systems can be selected: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display # # Set the seat, the Head-up Display and the outside mirror to the desired position. Press memory button M and then press pre‐ set position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec‐ onds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. Seats and stowing # To call up: press and briefly hold memory position switch 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, the front seat, Head-up Display and outside mirrors are moved into the stored position. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If you do not adequately stow objects in the vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always restrain the objects they contain in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. # Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. 99 100 Seats and stowing # # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Locking/unlocking the glove box Overview of the front stowage compart‐ ments 1 Stowage space in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a multimedia and USB connection 3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with a USB connection 4 Glove box # Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐ wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to unlock). Seats and stowing 101 Opening the stowage compartment for cus‐ tomer documents in the glove box Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat Folding the rear seat backrest forwards & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged # To open: turn the handle to the left or right. If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐ wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐ partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, the lock verification indicator will be red. Requirements: R To fold forward the middle seat backrest: the middle seat backrest has been unlocked. The center and outer seat backrests can be fol‐ ded forwards separately. 102 Seats and stowing # # Folding back the rear seat backrest Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one section of the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision. If necessary, fully insert the rear seat back‐ rest head restraints. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped when folding back the seat back‐ rest. The release handles are located beneath the rear shelf. # Left and right seat backrests: pull the left or right release handle 1 and fold the corre‐ sponding seat backrest forwards. # # # # Center seat backrest: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards. Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. If necessary, reset the driver's or front passenger seat. Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐ wards, if necessary. Seats and stowing 103 Locking the release catch of the center rear seat backrest Requirements: R The left and center seat backrests are engaged and joined together. You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest. # Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. # # # Fold the center and left seat backrests for‐ wards. To lock: slide catch 1 upwards. The release catch of the center seat backrest will be locked. To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards. 104 Seats and stowing Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 99). Opening or closing the stowage space under the trunk floor Attaching a roof rack & WARNING Risk of injury if the maximum roof load is exceeded When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics change. During cor‐ nering, the vehicle tilts more strongly and may react more sluggishly to steering move‐ ments. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐ ing and braking characteristics, will be greatly impaired. # Always comply with the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. # 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat) # To open: lift the trunk floor at recess 1 and swing it upwards. To close: fold the trunk floor downwards. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. Seats and stowing 105 * NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks which have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐ led, the sliding sunroof can be fully raised. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐ led, the trunk lid can be fully opened. # Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sus‐ tain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by a nonapproved roof rack The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof rack not tested and approved for MercedesBenz. # When a roof rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. * NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects. # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. 106 Seats and stowing # # # Secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1. Comply with the roof rack manufacturer's installation instructions. Secure the load on the roof rack. # # # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. Cup holder Installing the cup holder in or removing it from the center console (automatic trans‐ mission) & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐ pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover # # To remove: slide snap-in brackets 1 of the cup holder inwards until they are unlocked. Move the cup holder upwards out of the stowage compartment. % The cup holder and the rubber mat beneath it can be removed for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water. Seats and stowing 107 Slide the cup holder onto the bars in the stowage compartment. # Slide snap-in brackets 1 outwards until they engage. # Press button 2 and/or 4. Wings 3 fold upwards. % The cup holder wings can be folded down‐ wards and locked. The cup holder's holding function will then not be available. # * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. % Depending on its equipment, your vehicle will have a rear armrest with a cup holder. Opening or closing the cup holders in the rear armrest Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover # To install: if necessary, open the stowage compartment cover and insert the cup holder, as shown, into the stowage compart‐ ment with the imprint facing the vehicle inte‐ rior. * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. # # To open: press cup holder 1 or 2. Cup holder 1 or 2 will extend automati‐ cally. To close: push cup holder 1 or 2 back until it engages. 108 Seats and stowing Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the front center console Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A) are permissible. # # Lift up socket cap 1. Insert the plug of the device. 12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐ rect handling of the socket & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ aged connecting cables or sockets You could receive an electric shock: R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket. If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could receive an electric shock. # Only use dry and damage-free connect‐ ing cables. # When the ignition is switched off, ensure that the 115 V socket is dry. # If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets pulled out of the paneling, immediately have the socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. # # Do not reach into the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Requirements: R Devices are equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150 W is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. Seats and stowing 109 R # # Open flap 3. Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. Using the 12 V socket in the trunk Requirements: # Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). USB port in the rear passenger compartment % Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear passenger compartment center console may vary. Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charging cable. 110 Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/load compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment There is a risk of fire, in particular, if you place more than one mobile phone in the mobile phone stowage compartment. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, espe‐ cially those made of metal. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow‐ age compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may be dam‐ aged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage media or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. Seats and stowing 111 R R R R R The charging function and wireless connec‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐ tion is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces‐ sary for wireless charging are excluded. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. You can find a list of compatible mobile phones at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of the marked surface on mat 1 as pos‐ sible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. # Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving. # To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out. Installing/removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. 112 Seats and stowing This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. # # # # # To install: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the foot‐ well. Press studs 1 onto holders 2. Adjust the corresponding seat. To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2. Remove the floor mat. Light and visibility 113 Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the T parking lamps indicator lamp is deactivated and replaced by the L low beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐ cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐ vant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand standing lamps X Right-hand standing lamps T Parking lamps and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) In the event of severe battery discharging, the standing lamps or parking lamps are automati‐ cally switched off to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. 114 Light and visibility R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 118). Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run‐ ning lamps will be switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐ ent light. # Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Operating the combination switch for the lights & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐ tion. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam flasher Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and visibility 115 High beam # To switch on: turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L low beam indicator lamp will be deactivated and replaced by the K high beam indica‐ tor lamp. # To switch off: push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. # To indicate permanently: push the combi‐ nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R Indicator operation activated by the driver can extend for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lamps High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signal light To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # Press button 1 . The hazard warning lamps will switch on auto‐ matically if: R the airbag has been deployed. # 116 Light and visibility Cornering light Cornering light function R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel is turned Traffic circle and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the current GPS posi‐ tion of the vehicle. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle or the inter‐ section. Adaptive Highbeam Assist The cornering light function improves the illumi‐ nation of the roadway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal indicator is switched on or the steering wheel is turned Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐ nize the following road users: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these or similar situations, the automatic high beam is not deactivated or is activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐ tions. Light and visibility 117 % Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available only in vehicles with LED high performance head‐ lamps. At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on automatically. The high beam switches off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h). R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient. At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h): R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐ lated automatically based on the distance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low-beam headlamps R High-beam headlamps Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off # To switch on: turn the light switch to the à position. # # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat‐ ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display comes on. To switch off: switch off the high beam using the combination switch. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. The exterior lighting is activated for the set time when the vehicle is parked. 118 Light and visibility Switching the surround lighting on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur‐ round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Control panel in the grab handle Front overhead control panel 1 p Rear passenger compartment reading lamp 1 2 3 4 5 p Front left reading lamp | Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Front right reading lamp # To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5 accordingly. # To switch on or off: press button 1. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort Setting the color # Select Color. # Set the desired color. 5 Ambient Lighting Light and visibility 119 % There are 64 colors available. Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. Activating the brightness for zones Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. The ACCENT, AMBIANCE and VENTS zones can be set separately. # Activating multi-colored lighting Select Color. # Select Multi-color. There are ten preset color combinations available. # Select a color combination. # Activating multi-colored animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation. The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi‐ ent lighting sequence will run. Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature set‐ ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the lighting switch-off delay time on or off. When this function is active, the interior light‐ ing is lit up for short time after the vehicle has been locked. 120 Light and visibility Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast # # Turn the combination switch to the correct position 1 - 5. Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wipes with washer fluid Changing the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before changing the wiper blades. Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and switch off again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press the î button on the combination switch for approx‐ imately three seconds(/ page 120). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. Removing the wiper blades Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐ shield. # Light and visibility 121 Installing the wiper blades # # # # # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐ tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐ rectly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐ shield. Switch on the ignition. Press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 120). The wiper arms will move into the original position. Switch off the ignition. 122 Light and visibility Maintenance display % The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐ judgment of distances when using the passenger mirror Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors The outside mirror on the front-passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. As a result, you may misjudge the distance between you and the road user driving behind you, for example, when changing lanes. # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐ der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐ nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐ led wiper blades. If the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. Light and visibility 123 outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # To adjust: briefly press button 2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as fol‐ lows: # Vehicles without electrically folding out‐ side mirrors: Manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: Press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐ bly engage in position. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. # # # To fold in or out: briefly press button 2. To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted. Press button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. % If the battery has been disconnected or com‐ pletely discharged, you will have to reset the Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐ soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐ trolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con‐ tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro‐ lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 124 Light and visibility The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans‐ mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐ tion function % The parking position is available only in vehi‐ cles with a memory function. The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 124). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. # # # Press button 1 to select the frontpassenger outside mirror. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2. Light and visibility 125 Calling up # Press button 1 to select the frontpassenger outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position. Operating the sun visors Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off. # # Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1 down. Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to the side. 126 Climate control Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 128) Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐ filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐ tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 9 0 Activates/deactivates synchroniza‐ tion(/ page 128) A w Sets the temperature on the front passenger side Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off 1 w Sets the temperature on the driver's side 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control Overview of the control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control 4 à Sets climate control to automatic The indicator lamps in the Ã, ¬, ¤, g, Á and 0 buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 5 ¬ Defrosts the windshield 6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater (/ page 127) on/off 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/ off(/ page 128) 8 Á Switches the A/C function on/ off(/ page 126) To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button. % If climate control is switched off, the win‐ dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly. # Switching the A/C function on or off via the control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿Á button. Climate control 127 Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐ wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction. Calling up the air conditioning menu Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 127). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C. Depending on the previous status, the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐ trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the _ or à button. In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained. Overview of air distribution settings The symbols on the display indicate which vents the airflow is being directed through: ¯ Defroster and side air vents P Center and side air vents O Footwell and side air vents S Center, side and footwell vents a Defroster, footwell and side air vents _ All vents b Defroster, middle and side air vents W Automatic air distribution Setting the air distribution Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 127). # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec‐ ted at the same time, for example to set the temperature/air conditioning for the wind‐ shield and the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. # 128 Climate control Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the control panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side are adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button. The synchronization function is deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function using the multime‐ dia system Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 127). # # Select First Row of Seats. Select SYNC. Depending on the previous status, the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Removing condensation from the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the ¬ button. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching the residual heat on/off (Canada) Requirements: R The vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To switch on: press the Á button. Residual heat is switched off automatically. Climate control 129 Adjusting the rear air vents Air vents Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and the ventilation grille in the vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits (/ page 390). # # To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go. To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. # # To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go. To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. 130 Driving and parking Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles Observe the notes on the following topics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers: R Emotion Start R AMG exhaust system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG adaptive sport suspension system R AMG steering-wheel buttons Switching on the power supply or the igni‐ tion (without engine start) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle". Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and has been recognized. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The brake pedal is not depressed. Driving and parking 131 To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐ tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Starting the vehicle # To switch on the power supply: press but‐ ton 1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ ton & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐ mals or environmental influences may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the engine or exhaust system. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ nized. # # Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. 132 Driving and parking If the vehicle does not start: switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. % You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three sec‐ onds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 134). # Starting the vehicle with SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. # # Marked space (example with cup holder without cover) # # # Open the cover of marked space 2 if neces‐ sary. Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 on symbol 3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, SmartKey 1 must be located in marked space 2 on sym‐ bol 3 during the entire journey. Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐ cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. Driving and parking 133 Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐ ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey % This function is not available in all countries. If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the previously selected air conditioning adjustment is active. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently filled. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. % You can also set the temperature with your smartphone. Information on Mercedes me connect and other services: https:// www.mercedes.me This function is not available for all models. Charging the battery before commencing your journey % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently filled. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin‐ tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐ tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐ ted once with the SmartKey before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time. 134 Driving and parking % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Breaking-in notes Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. R R R R R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐ est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach‐ ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐ pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Driving and parking 135 # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable footwear Operation of the pedals may be restricted due to unsuitable footwear such as: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers # When driving always wear suitable shoes in order to be able to operate the pedals safely. & WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐ ing off the ignition when driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will then need to use considerably more force to steer and brake. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ ing. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ faces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run‐ ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi‐ cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. 136 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco‐ hol and drugs while driving Driving when under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous combination. Even small quantities of alcohol or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception and judgment. The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐ dent greatly increases if you drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs. # Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while driving, and do not allow anyone to drive who has been drinking alcohol or taking drugs. # # * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐ uously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over‐ heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ ately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front Driving and parking 137 To remove salt build-up: Brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey R Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐ itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 422). Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body R Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise water can enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐ cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible height of the water The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. ECO start/stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐ mission position h or i. Vehicles with automatic transmission: If you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐ sion position h or i, the engine will automati‐ cally stop in the following situations: R You stop behind a vehicle that is pulling away. R You stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐ cle in front of you. R You turn the steering wheel hard at a low speed. 138 Driving and parking % In transmission position k, the engine is not switched off automatically even when the HOLD function is switched on. The engine is restarted automatically if: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: In transmission position h, you release the brake pedal when the HOLD function is not active. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: You shift into transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the vehicle. ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐ function display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐ tions for an engine stop have been met. R R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐ gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. The èOFF symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction. % If, in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor, the engine should be switched off by the ECO start/stop function, you have the following options: R Switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐ sion position h or i. R You engage transmission position j. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. The Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting display message also appears in the multifunction display. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after three minutes. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on. % A continuous display appears in the instru‐ ment cluster while the ECO start/stop func‐ tion is deactivated. # Driving and parking 139 ECO display function The ECO display summarizes your driving char‐ acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption if you: R Drive with particular care. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: Drive in drive program ;. R Observe the gearshift recommendations. The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop‐ ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop‐ ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at the same time R The edge around all three segments will light up The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs: = (Individual): individual settings C (Sport): sporty driving style A (Comfort): comfortable and economical driving style ; (Eco): particularly economical driving style (vehicles with automatic transmis‐ sion) 140 Driving and parking % The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board com‐ puter. Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive: Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP® R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjust‐ ment: suspension R Electric power steering Selecting the drive program % Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is equipped with either a switch or a button. # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. # # Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2. The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the multifunction display. Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 2 again. The chosen drive program appears. Driving and parking 141 Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I Select Individual Config.. # Select and set a category. # Switching the reset display on/off # Switch Request at Start on or off. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐ tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐ ted the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐ matically. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor‐ que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam‐ ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature % The values displayed serve only as orienta‐ tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values. Calling up fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. 142 Driving and parking Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐ mission position. The current transmission posi‐ tion is displayed in the multifunction display. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. j Park position k Reverse gear Driving and parking 143 i Neutral h Drive position Engaging reverse gear R Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display k is shown in the multifunction display. # Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. The transmission position display i is shown in the multifunction display. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Start the vehicle. Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ mission remains in neutral i. # Engaging park position P Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 150). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary. # When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. Park position is only engaged when the transmission position display j is shown in the multifunction display. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehi‐ cle to prevent it from rolling away. # Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐ tion h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. % At very low outside temperatures below approx. -4 °F (-20 °C), you may not be able to shift the transmission from j to another transmission position when the engine is switched off. If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the engine is running. 144 Driving and parking Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display h is shown in the multifunction display. When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed Manual gearshifting & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ faces to increase the engine braking effect. When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto‐ matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐ shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. Transmission position p and the cur‐ rent gear appear in the multifunction display. % How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐ vated is dependent on various factors. Man‐ ual shifting can be deactivated automatically when changing the drive program, restarting the vehicle when the transmission position is engaged again h or due to the driving style. # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear‐ shift paddle 1, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear. Driving and parking 145 # Glide mode function To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position h appears in the multifunction display. Permanent setting: Change to drive program =(/ page 140). # Select drive setting p (/ page 141). # Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. Gearshift recommendation Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. # If gearshift recommendation message 1 is shown on the multifunction display, shift to the recommended gear. Using kickdown Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐ erator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position h is displayed in green in the multifunction display. Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ tions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). 146 Driving and parking % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation % Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshift paddle (/ page 144). Driving and parking 147 Problems with the transmission Problem The transmission has a faulty gearshift. The acceleration characteristics are deteriorating. The transmission no longer shifts gear. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission is losing oil. Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # The transmission is in emergency operation mode. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Switch the transmission to position j. # Switch off the engine. # Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. # Switch the transmission to position h. # Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Function of 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven when needed. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insuffi‐ cient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. 148 Driving and parking Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can create sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapors. # # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge can build up again. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # The RON requirement is located in the fuel filler flap. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Driving and parking 149 Never refuel using any of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ cles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks # % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements R The vehicle is unlocked (/ page 65). 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Fuel type 150 Driving and parking 4 Tire pressure table 5 QR code for rescue card Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. # Insert the fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap 1. % Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. # # Parking Parking the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐ cle rolling away. If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐ ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # Ensure that the parked vehicle is always properly secured against rolling away as follows: R On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. R Apply the parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ sion: shift the transmission to posi‐ tion j. R Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first 1 or reverse gear k. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ land or harvested grain fields. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. Driving and parking 151 R ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 143). # Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes if the driver's door is closed. Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. Garage door opener # * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away. # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying the brake pedal. On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage transmission position j in a station‐ Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. 152 Driving and parking # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, people in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or struck by the door. # When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐ ture. R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards. Requirements: R R R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. The engine is switched off. The ignition is switched on. % The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on. # # Check if the transmission frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ cator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ gramming was successful. Additionally, Driving and parking 153 % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects, are located outside the range of movement of the door. Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # # Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com‐ plete. # # # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported. Replace the batteries in remote control 5. Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. 154 Driving and parking Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐ tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control. % Support and additional information on pro‐ gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515. R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes. Clearing the garage door opener memory # Opening or closing the door Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. # # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. Radio equipment approval numbers for the garage door opener Driving and parking 155 Radio equipment approval numbers Brazil Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐ ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para maiores informações acessar www.anatel.gov.br Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio type approval number Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448 Monaco CE R-NZ New Zea‐ land R-NZ Barbados MED1578 Norway CE Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74 Not required European Union CE Russian Federa‐ tion Gibraltar CE Saudi Ara‐ bia TA 10525 Iceland CE TRC/LPD/2015/299 Switzer‐ land CE Jordan Canada IC: 4112A-MUAHL5 Kuwait CE Liechten‐ stein CE Country Radio type approval number Egypt TAC.2511151293.WIR Andorra CE Australia South Africa TA-2015/1386 Turkey Not required 156 Driving and parking Country Radio type approval number United Arab Emi‐ rates ER41849/15 Dealer No: DA35176/14 United States FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5 Further information on the declaration of con‐ formity for wireless vehicle components (/ page 25). Electric parking brake # Electric parking brake function (applying automatically) # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐ mission is in position j and one of the follow‐ ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ tionary. Driving and parking 157 R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the following condi‐ tions must be fulfilled: R You shift from transmission position j. R You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying 158 Driving and parking Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐ ously. # Releasing Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. # Emergency braking Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru‐ ment cluster. # Information on detecting damage on a parked vehicle parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐ uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key. R Impact occurs at low speed. R The electric parking brake is not applied. The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a twostory garage. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period % Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐ vate the tow-away alarm, damage detection will also be deactivated. % In the case of severe battery discharging, the function for detecting damage on a If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐ aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 159 Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ tery's period out of use) Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐ ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R the starter battery is preserved. R the maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. R the connection to online services is interrup‐ ted. R the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐ able. R the interior motion sensor and tow-away alarm functions are not available. R the function for detecting damage on a parked vehicle is not available. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R the engine is switched off. R the ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐ tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐ not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby Mode message appears in the media display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ ing the vehicle for an extended period) Requirements: R The engine is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Standby Mode on or off. When you activate the function, a prompt appears. # Select Yes. Standby mode is activated. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐ taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Information on radar and ultrasonic sensors Some driving and driving safety systems use radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area 160 Driving and parking in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depend‐ ing on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grill. The ultrasonic sensors are located in the front and rear bump‐ ers. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush (/ page 396). The sensors must not be cov‐ ered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against stone chipping. Additional license plate bracket can likewise impair the function of the ultrasonic sensors. In the event of damage to the bumpers or radiator grill, or following a collision impacting the bumpers or radiator grill, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the sensors are damaged, some driving systems and driving safety systems may no longer function properly. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems: R 360° Camera (/ page 196) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 161) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 173) R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 170) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 164) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 212) R Start-off assist (/ page 187) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 205) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 161) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 185) R Suspension with adaptive damping adjust‐ ment (/ page 187) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 164) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 161) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 164) Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 177) HOLD function (/ page 185) STEER CONTROL (/ page 164) Active Steering Assist with rescue lane func‐ tion (/ page 179) Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 183) Active Parking Assist (/ page 199) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 188) Rear view camera (/ page 193) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 181) Cruise control (/ page 170) Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 209) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 207) Driving and parking 161 Function of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yel‐ low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐ uously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started. Function of BAS (Brake Assist System) & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ tem) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram) & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers. 162 Driving and parking ESP® can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road‐ way. R When braking. R In strong side winds when you are driving faster than 47 mph (75 km/h). If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the following points when ESP® is deac‐ tivated: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. R R The drive wheels could spin. ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐ ted by ESP® when braking. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum‐ stances. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow‐ ing situations: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐ ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 515) R Display messages (/ page 468) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery roadway. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐ ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 140). Driving and parking 163 ESP® characteristics per drive program Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics A (Comfort) ; (Economy) ESP® Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balance between traction and stability. Select drive program ; or A in difficult road conditions, such as snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain. C (Sport) ESP® Sport This drive program continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐ siastic driver a more active driving style. Select drive program C in good road condi‐ tions, for example on dry roads and clear stretches of road. Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ bility Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. # Select ESP. A prompt appears. # Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. 164 Driving and parking Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist Function of STEER CONTROL Function of Active Brake Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ ual brake application on one side. STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given particu‐ larly in the following situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Evasive Steering Assist Function of EBD (electronic brake force dis‐ tribution) EBD is characterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli‐ sion. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐ tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. Driving and parking 165 In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐ tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐ imum full-stop braking if necessary. If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐ tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake # If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display 1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. % If the system is unavailable, the æ display appears in the multifunction display. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: The distance warning function issues a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐ sioning of the seat belt. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐ ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. 166 Driving and parking The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel‐ ing in front Stationary cyclists Vehicles without Driv‐ ing Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Vehicles with Driving Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 62 mph (100 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Driving and parking 167 The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel‐ ing in front Stationary cyclists Vehicles without Driv‐ ing Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) Up to approx. 31 mph (50 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Vehicles with Driving Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 62 mph (100 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) 168 Driving and parking Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: Vehicles traveling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel‐ ing in front Stationary cyclists Vehicles without Driv‐ ing Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) No reaction Vehicles with Driving Assis‐ tance Pack‐ age Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) Up to approx. 62 mph (100 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) Up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h) Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐ cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. Driving and parking 169 R R R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ imately 43 mph (70 km/h). R not give a warning or not provide assis‐ tance # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. Be ready to brake and take evasive action if necessary. Prevent the assistance by actively steering in non-critical driving situa‐ tions. Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐ trians are close to the path of your vehi‐ cle. # You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. # & WARNING Risk of an accident despite Evasive Steering Assist # Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can: R give an unnecessary warning or provide assistance System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R R R R R R R R R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐ ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. On bends with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐ matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in period. 170 Driving and parking Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist The following settings are available: R Early R Medium R Late # Select a setting. The setting is retained when the engine is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono‐ mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐ ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Function of Adaptive Brake Lights Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions: R By flashing the brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic traveling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is traveling at speeds of more than 43 mph (70 km/h) at the beginning of the brake application, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button. Speed control cruise control Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐ ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maxi‐ mum speed. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐ trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Driving and parking 171 Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Displays in the multifunction display The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Cruise control is selected 2 Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated 3 Speed is saved, cruise control is activated % The segments between the stored speed and the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer. System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐ ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐ tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor. Operating cruise control & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements: R R R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. The driven speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h). The transmission is in position h. 172 Driving and parking Press rocker switch 3 up (RES). The last stored speed is called up and main‐ tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the currently driven speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared. # To increase/reduce speed: press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+). If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is dis‐ # # # or To activate cruise control: press rocker switch 1 up. To activate cruise control: press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-). The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. played in the instrument cluster, you can choose between the following options: # To adopt the detected speed: press rocker switch 3 up (RES). The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed. # To deactivate cruise control: press rocker switch 3 down (CNCL). # To switch off cruise control: press rocker switch 1 down. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. Driving and parking 173 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main‐ tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h) and, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h). Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐ fortable or dynamic) (/ page 139) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent) Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐ ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa‐ rate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi‐ cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehi‐ cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis‐ tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. 174 Driving and parking R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐ erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. # # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # In these cases, adjust your speed and keep a sufficient distance. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. Driving and parking 175 R R R R R The transmission is in position h. The driver's door is closed. Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space. The vehicle does not skid. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: or press rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. or To activate with a stored speed: press rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. % By pressing rocker switch 4 up again, the speed limitation shown in the instrument cluster will be adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or variable limiter. # To accept the displayed speed restriction when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active: press rocker switch 4 up (RES). The speed limit displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. # # Press button 1. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-), 176 Driving and parking Accepting the displayed speed restriction when Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted # Press rocker switch 4 up (RES). The speed limit displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Remove your foot from the brake pedal and activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. # Press rocker switch 4 up (RES). or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. Press rocker switch 4 down (CNCL). % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. # Increasing or reducing the speed Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). # or # Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 5 mph (10 km/h). Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐ tance from the vehicle in front # Press rocker switch 2 up or down. Driving and parking 177 Function of Active Speed Limit Assist % The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. If a change in the speed limit is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 208). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐ ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom‐ mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom‐ mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec‐ ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The maximum permissi‐ ble speed also depends on factors such as the road surface and traffic conditions. System limits Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. In these sit‐ uations you must adjust your speed yourself. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R In the wet or in fog R When towing a trailer # # Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. 178 Driving and parking Function of route-based speed adaptation % The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐ vated, the vehicle speed will be adjusted accord‐ ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐ ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐ fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be config‐ ured in the multimedia system (/ page 179). The following route events are taken into account: R Bends R T-intersections, traffic circles and toll sta‐ tions R Turns and exits % When the toll station is reached, Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐ cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, traffic cir‐ cles and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐ still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adjustment is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, for example unclear roads, lane narrowing, wet road surfaces, snow or ice, or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjust‐ ment made by the system may not always be suitable. In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adjustment Route-based speed adjustment might mal‐ function or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: Driving and parking 179 R R R R R R # If the driver does not follow the calcula‐ ted route If map data is not up to date or available In road construction areas In bad weather or road conditions If the accelerator pedal is depressed In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations Adjust the speed to the traffic situation. Setting route-based speed adaptation Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead. % Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 178). Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist % The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐ essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane to form a rescue lane, for example. When the system is actively steering, the à symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. During the transition from active to passive status, the à symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the sys‐ tem is passive, the à symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display. Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐ vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must 180 Driving and parking expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. R The driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes, the driver must make sure that the neighboring lane is free (glance over the shoulder). If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐ play 1 appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. The warning is not issued, or is stopped, when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle. System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the roadway. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R R R R R R Insufficient road illumination. The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, e.g. in a construction area or inter‐ sections. The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight bends and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At traffic circles or toll stations. Driving and parking 181 R R When actively changing lane without switch‐ ing on the turn signal indicator. When the tire pressure is too low. Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. Observe the status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display (/ page 183). & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐ tion to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes A malfunction in the detection of lane mark‐ ings and objects can occur. This could cause unexpected steering inter‐ vention. # Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select a Steering Assist. Function of Active Lane Change Assist % The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐ ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The driven speed is between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is switched on and active. 182 Driving and parking If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig‐ nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow 2 next to the steering wheel sym‐ bol. The Lane Change to the Left message also appears, for example. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow 1 appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display. If the assistance graphic is shown when chang‐ ing lanes, the lane change display appears with an additional arrow pointing towards the adja‐ cent lane (/ page 183). If a lane change is not possible, the arrow fades out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the Lane Change Canceled message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. & WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐ ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always detect clearly if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐ antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torques. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 179). Driving and parking 183 The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty, damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a fault. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist If the driver continually ignores the visual or acoustic warning to put their hands on the steer‐ ing wheel, the Beginning Emergency Stop mes‐ sage appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehi‐ cle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Pressing a steering-wheel button R Operating Touch Control R Activating or deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Overview of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐ ter The assistance graphic and the status display show the status of the following functions in the instrument cluster: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Route-based speed adaptation R Active Steering Assist 184 Driving and parking Assistant display Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐ play and route-based speed adaptation event Vehicle in front Distance indicator Set specified distance Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis‐ play speed stored, no vehicle detected (bright vehicle symbol) 4 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐ cle symbol) 5 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and routebased speed adaptation active, speed stored % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐ cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐ sive mode. The ç Suspended message appears in the multifunction display. 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route 2 3 4 5 3 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, 1 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, set specified distance (number of segments below the vehicle) 2 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐ ted, speed stored Speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐ eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐ tions to the speed due to manual or automatic Driving and parking 185 adoption of the speed limit, are displayed in the control feedback of the multifunction display on a single line. Active Steering Assist status display ing. Once the system is passive, symbol 1 is shown as gray in the multifunction display. Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ lowing conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. 1 Gray steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and passive 2 Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and active 3 Flashing steering wheel: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limits detected During the transition from active to passive sta‐ tus, symbol 3 is shown as enlarged and flash‐ This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle and it can roll away. # Therefore, swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐ cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐ still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐ bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. 186 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle can roll away in the following situations: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving the vehicle. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati‐ cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R R R The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position h, k or i Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the multifunction display. # Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ play disappears from the multifunction dis‐ play. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is switched to position j. Driving and parking 187 R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the power supply is insufficient. Start-off assist Function of start-off assist Start-off assist enables optimal vehicle accelera‐ tion from a standstill. For this, a suitably highgrip road surface is required, the tires and vehi‐ cle must also be in good condition. Do not activate start-off assist on public roads. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐ tion on ESP® (/ page 161). Activating the start-off assist # & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use start-off assist, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐ ding and accident! # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. # # # # # # Deactivating ESP® (/ page 163). Move the steering wheel to the straightahead position. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and keep it depressed. Engage the h drive position (/ page 144). Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 140). Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully. # Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐ tion. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐ dure is complete. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Canceling start-off assist Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. # Function of adaptive damping adjustment Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load R The drive program selected 188 Driving and parking R The driving style The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐ tiple sensors 1 on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys‐ tem, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater dis‐ tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 193). % The Warn Early All Around setting is always active in the rear of the vehicle. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is unavailable. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a 360° Camera Driving and parking 189 R R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less Display of Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the Head-up Display The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360° Camera If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn‐ ing display is based on the distance to the detec‐ ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. Optionally, obstacles detected by Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides 3 can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. 190 Driving and parking Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Vehicles with 360° Camera Vehicles without 360° Camera Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐ ments 2 light up red. The é sym‐ # Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again. # Check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. Driving and parking 191 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions bol appears in the multifunction dis‐ play. Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐ ments 2 light up red. At the same time, a warning tone sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started. The é symbol appears in the multifunction display. The sensors are dirty. Clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 396). # Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction. Start the vehicle again. # If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Function of the passive side impact protec‐ tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec‐ tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐ cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The segments on the sides light up yellow or red, depending on the distance to the obstacle. Segment color depending on distance Color Lateral distance Yellow Approx. 1.0 - 2.0 ft (30 - 60 cm) Red Approx. < 1.0 ft (30 cm) In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all 192 Driving and parking System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro‐ tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam‐ ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐ played. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a 360° Camera 1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red) Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐ tion. R You open the doors. After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐ cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth‐ erwise be damaged. Driving and parking 193 If the é symbol is shown in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. Multimedia system: 4 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 PARKTRONIC # Activate or deactivate the function. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value. Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐ cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function. Reversing camera Function of the rear view camera Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function. When you engage reverse gear, the image from rear view camera 1 is shown in the media dis‐ play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps you to orient your‐ self and to avoid obstacles when backing up. 194 Driving and parking The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐ ing. The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐ played only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ 2 3 4 5 face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Bumper Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area Wide-angle view Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Driving and parking 195 5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less) 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐ tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)) Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) % If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows: R The rear segments are shown in red when backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐ ing forwards. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out (/ page 190). Wide-angle view System failure 196 Driving and parking If the rear view camera is not operational, a mes‐ sage appears in the multimedia system. System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 396). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐ aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket or bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐ ity. The views of the 360° Camera are always availa‐ ble when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incor‐ rectly or not show them at all. It is not a substi‐ tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360° Camera You can select from different views: Driving and parking 197 Top view R R 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐ era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle 2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 3 Your vehicle from above The color of the individual segments of warning display 2 is based on the distance to the detec‐ ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray. % If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows: R The rear segments are shown in red when backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐ ing forwards. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out (/ page 190). 198 Driving and parking Guide lines The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) % When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 1 are displayed in green. 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out 2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If the 360° Camera is not ready for operation, the following message appears in the multimedia system: System limits The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In Driving and parking 199 this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. % Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir‐ cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth‐ ers or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. If the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi‐ tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 396). Selecting a view for the 360° Camera Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 196). # Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle. Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses ultrasound and is automatically activated during forward travel. The system is operational at speeds below approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). If all requirements are met, the Ç display appears in the multifunction display. The system then independently locates and measures paral‐ lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the È display appears in the multi‐ function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path, switches on the turn signal indicator and assists you in parking and exiting the parking space. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist provides assistance when chang‐ ing gear, accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. 200 Driving and parking Active Parking Assist is canceled if, among other things, one of the following actions is carried out: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R Active Parking Assist is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: you engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the doors or the trunk lid while driving. System limits Objects located above or below the detection range of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or Active Parking Assist are not detected when the park‐ ing space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking maneuver is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g. the following: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐ ately next to each other. R If the parking space is immediately next to a low obstacle such as a curb. Driving and parking 201 Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: R If the parking space is on a curb. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐ cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer. Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console. # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Park‐ ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3. % Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If you have driven past a parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill. # Select desired parking space 4. # Where necessary, select the parking direc‐ tion: forwards or reverse. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction. 202 Driving and parking # Confirm selected parking space 4. % The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐ matically when the parking procedure begins. The turn signal indicator is switched off automatically when you switch to h. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐ tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐ tor accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi‐ tion. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro‐ cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. The parking procedure can then be continued. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position will be changed again. If the vehicle has not yet reached the parking space, the parking pro‐ cedure will be canceled, should a gear be changed. Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐ cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle. Driving and parking 203 & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space # # Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. If the vehicle has been parked at right angles to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3, left or right. % The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path. # Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space. % The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐ matically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐ tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐ tor accordingly. While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. # If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi‐ tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐ matically. After the exiting procedure has been completed, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of 204 Driving and parking Vehicle message appears in the media display. A warning tone and the following display in the media display prompt you to take over control of the vehicle: In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: R Warn you without reason and limit the vehicle speed. R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle speed. # You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in the media display. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h when the vehicle is at a standstill. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐ vated in the multimedia system. System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 188). Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Also read the instructions on Blind Spot Assist (/ page 209). Driving and parking 205 R R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐ vated in the multimedia system. System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 209). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when backing up out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, symbol 1 appears in the media dis‐ play. If the driver does not respond to the warn‐ ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automat‐ ically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ tance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. % Maneuvering assistance must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 204). ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐ nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐ gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ ted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐ play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. 206 Driving and parking You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: The fuller the circle, the higher the atten‐ tional level determined As your attention wanes, the circle in the center of the display becomes smaller If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐ ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: R If you have been driving for less than approx‐ imately 30 minutes. R R R R R R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). If there is a strong side wind. If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐ nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. If the time has been set incorrectly. In active driving situations, if you change lanes and vary your speed frequently. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐ tinuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break). Driving and parking 207 Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting a rest area Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity. # Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. # Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐ tifunction camera 1. It assists you by display‐ ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐ tions in the instrument cluster and optionally in the Head-up Display or central display. Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs: R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. free‐ way entry or exit roads. R When a village or city boundary which is stored in the digital map is passed. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. 208 Driving and parking Display in the Instrument Display missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display: R R Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction % Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis‐ play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐ rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup‐ ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes‐ sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 468). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because they are covered or due to insufficient lighting. If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. Driving and parking 209 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Traffic Sign Assist Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed. If a vehicle is detected close to the side of your vehicle, the red warning lamp in the outside mir‐ ror flashes. If you switch on the turn signal indi‐ cator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds once. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist # 5 Assistance Activating/deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate or deactivate the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % If one of the following systems is activated, the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter Further information (/ page 174). Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display. Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off. Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐ quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐ 210 Driving and parking cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu‐ pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning reacts neither to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly different speed. As a result, the exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear‐ ance. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐ mum of three minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐ tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐ cle occupants. System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐ ders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obsta‐ cles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐ side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐ longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Driving and parking 211 Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) % The brake application function is only availa‐ ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance Package. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following: R If vehicles overtake too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐ ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐ uations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐ play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. 212 Driving and parking System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detected. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist. % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is available. # Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐ tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and gui‐ ded by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane. You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐ ing wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. You will also be guided back into your lane by means of a course-correcting brake application if the following conditions are met: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on both edges of the lane. R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐ ing. You can activate or deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis‐ played in the on-board computer: R ð (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. R ð (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating. Driving and parking 213 R ï: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva‐ ted or there is a malfunction. Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist can bring the vehicle back into the lane with a lane-correcting brake application. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a brake application will only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adja‐ cent lane. Oncoming traffic can be detected. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package or Driving Assistance Plus Package: overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can also be detected. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age or Driving Assistance Plus Package: a lane-correcting brake application also takes place when, in addition to a broken lane mark‐ ing, the edge of a firm road surface is detected (e.g. central reservation). Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐ play 1 appears in the multifunction display. Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist % The availability of the following function is country-dependent. A lane-correcting brake application also occurs in the Sensitive setting in the following situa‐ tions: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a solid lane marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ erate. R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐ tor (situation-dependent). R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐ eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. 214 Driving and parking The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐ ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the roadway is very narrow and winding. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sen‐ sors to monitor several areas around the vehicle. If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered with snow, the system may be impaired or may not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detec‐ ted, no lane-correcting brake application occurs. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Activating/deactivating the haptic warning Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function. # Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐ tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐ mitted towing methods (/ page 413) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 414). Instrument Display and on-board computer 215 Instrument Display overview Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers. Instrument Display (standard) R R If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Media Vehicle dynamics Styles Maintenance Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐ pit & WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐ functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐ tems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. R R 1 Speedometer (example) 2 Multifunction display 3 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐ tor Further content can be shown on the multifunc‐ tion display 2: R Assistant display R Telephone R Navigation R Trip R Radio 1 2 3 4 5 Speedometer (example) Multifunction display Tachometer (example) Coolant temperature gauge Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator, range 216 Instrument Display and on-board computer % In addition to multifunction display 2, fur‐ ther content can be shown on displays 1 and 3 (/ page 219). The segments on speedometer 1 indicate the system status for the following: R Cruise control(/ page 170) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 173) * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ revving range. The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tachometer (overrevving range) is reached. Vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit: during normal operating conditions, coolant tempera‐ ture display 4 may rise to the red mark. & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel 1 P Back/Home button, on-board com‐ puter Press and hold: shows standard display 2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system: £ Voice Control System ß Displays favorites VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 (press) Instrument Display and on-board computer 217 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call 5 ò Calls up the home screen 6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button Operating the on-board computer Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the on-board computer. % The on-board computer displays will appear on the multifunction display (/ page 220). The on-board computer is operated using lefthand Touch Control 2 and left-hand back/ home button 1. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone R Navigation R Trip R Radio R Media R Designs & Disp. R Service The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the multifunction display. # To call up the menu bar: press back button on the left 1 until the menu bar is dis‐ played. 218 Instrument Display and on-board computer % Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer. # # To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐ tion: press left-hand Touch Control 2. To exit a submenu: press back button on the left 1. Selecting the Head-up Display To switch on the Head-up Display: switch on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swip‐ ing upwards on left-hand Touch Control 2. The Head-up Display menu has been selec‐ ted on the Head-up Display. # To switch to the Head-up Display: press left-hand Touch Control 2 or swipe upwards on left-hand Touch Control 2. # To select what the Head-up Display shows: swipe upwards or downwards on lefthand Touch Control 2. # % The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit. # # # To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on left-hand Touch Control 2. To call up a menu or confirm a selection: press left-hand Touch Control 2. To scroll through displays or lists on the menu: swipe upwards or downwards on lefthand Touch Control 2. Full-screen menu Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit: the following menus can be shown in full on the Instrument Display: R Assistance R R # # Trip Navigation On the corresponding menu, use left-hand Touch Control 2 to scroll to the end of the list. Press left-hand Touch Control 2. The selected menu will be displayed in full. Adjusting the design of the Instrument Dis‐ play On-board computer: 4 Designs & Disp. Setting the design Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The Instrument Display will be shown in the selected design. The following designs can be selected, depend‐ ing on the vehicle equipment: R Classic # Instrument Display and on-board computer 219 R R R R Sport Progressive Understated Standard Displays Showing display content on the instrument cluster Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit: additional display content can be shown on the instrument cluster. % The display content on the instrument clus‐ ter adapts to the respective topic selection in the multimedia system. # To select display content: swipe to the right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control to select the required display content. When the display content is selected, it will briefly be highlighted. 1 The index points show the selected display content. 2 Display content, left (example: speedometer) When the display content is selected 2, it will briefly be highlighted. Display content selection, left: R Speedometer R Time/date R Trip computer From Start and From Reset R Range R Audio 3 Display content, center (example: media menu) The index points show the selected menu content. The menu content of the respective menu from the menu bar on the multifunction display is dis‐ played in the display content, center. Display content menu selection, center: R Assistance R Telephone R Navigation R Trip 220 Instrument Display and on-board computer R R R R Radio Media Styles and display Service R Assistant display Overview of displays on the multifunction display 4 Display content, right (example: tachometer) Display content selection, right: Tachometer R Average fuel consumption R ECO display R Navigation R G-meter R 1 Outside temperature 2 Time 3 Digital speedometer 4 Display section 5 Drive program 6 Transmission position % Vehicles with standard Instrument Dis‐ play: the position of the displays differs from those shown here. Further displays on the multifunction display: Gearshift recommendation (/ page 145) Z u Active Parking Assist (/ page 201) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 192) h Cruise control (/ page 170) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 173) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 170) à Active Steering Assist (/ page 179) ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 212) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 181) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 137) ë HOLD function (/ page 185) Instrument Display and on-board computer 221 _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 116) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 207). Adjusting the instrument lighting # Turn brightness control 1 up or down. The lighting of the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior is adjusted. R R Menus and submenus Calling up functions on the Service menu of the on-board computer On-board computer: 4 Service # To select a function: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Functions on the Service menu: R Message memory (/ page 468) R Tires: Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 430) Check the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ sure monitor (/ page 428) Restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 429) ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date (/ page 384) Coolant: coolant temperature display Engine Oil Level: engine oil level Consumption Info: fuel life cycle consump‐ tion - R R Calling up displays on the Assistance menu On-board computer: 4 Assistance The following displays are available on the Assis‐ tance menu: R Assistance R Attention level (/ page 205) R Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit: full screen # To switch between the displays: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. 222 Instrument Display and on-board computer R R ¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist active Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays (/ page 173) R R R R R Digital speedometer Current fuel consumption ECO display (/ page 139) Trip computer From Start and From Reset Full screen Calling up displays on the Trip menu % The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit. Status displays on the assistant display: R Û ATTENTION ASSIST: deactivated R Gray lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist activated R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist active R ¸ Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena‐ bled On-board computer: 4 Trip # To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand Touch Control. Trip menu in the standard cockpit: R Speedometer R Digital speedometer R Tachometer R Range and current fuel consumption R ECO display (/ page 139) R Trip computer From Start and From Reset Trip menu in the Widescreen Cockpit: Standard display R Standard display (example) 1 Trip distance 2 Total distance Instrument Display and on-board computer 223 1 2 3 4 Trip computer (example) Total distance Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption % The illustrations show the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit. Resetting values on the Trip menu of the onboard computer Calling up navigation instructions on the onboard computer On-board computer: 4 Trip You can reset the values of the following func‐ tions: R Trip distance R Trip computer From Start and From Reset R ECO display (/ page 139) On-board computer: 4 Navigation The following displays are available in the naviga‐ tion menu: R Navigation view R Map view R Full-surface map view # # # # To select the function to be reset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Press the left-hand Touch Control. Select Yes . Press the left-hand Touch Control. If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol, the values of the function will be reset immediately. Example: no change of direction announced 1 Distance to the next change of direction 2 Distance to the next destination 224 Instrument Display and on-board computer 3 Estimated arrival time at next destination 4 Current road 1 2 3 4 5 6 Example: change of direction announced Distance to the change of direction Road to which the change of direction leads Change-of-direction symbol Recommended lane (white) Possible lane Lane not recommended (dark gray) Further possible displays on the Navigation menu: R Direction of Travel: display of direction of travel and road currently being traveled on. R New Route... or Calculating Route...: a new route is being calculated. R Road Not Mapped: the road is unknown, e.g. for newly built roads. R No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. R Off Map: the map for the current location is not available. R Area of Dest. Reached: when an intermediate destination is reached, the intermediate des‐ tination flag will be displayed with the num‐ ber of the intermediate destination Î. After this, route guidance will continue. Once the destination is reached, the checkered flag Í will be displayed. Route guidance will now be complete # To exit the menu: press the back button on the left. Vehicles with the MBUX multimedia system: You can also start navigation to one of the recent destinations on the Navigation menu: # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To select a destination: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Route guidance will start. If route guidance has already been activated, a query will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. # Select Yes. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Route guidance will start. Instrument Display and on-board computer 225 Selecting radio stations using the on-board computer On-board computer: 4 Radio frequency range, an asterisk will appear next to the station name. # To select a radio station: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting the frequency range or memory preset # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Operating media playback using the onboard computer On-board computer: 4 Media 1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of track 1 Media source 2 Track number and current track 3 Name of artist (example) % The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit When you select a station from the memory pre‐ sets, the preset will appear next to the station name. When you select a saved station in the % The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit # To change tracks on an active media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. 226 Instrument Display and on-board computer Changing a media source # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To select a media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Dialing telephone numbers using the onboard computer & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. When using the phone, observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. Requirements: R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ media system. On-board computer: 4 Phone The most recent telephone calls (dialed, received and missed calls) are displayed on the Phone menu. # To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. If there is only one telephone number saved to an entry: the telephone number will be selected. # If there are multiple telephone numbers saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand Touch Control to select the desired telephone number. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The telephone number will be dialed. The following displays may appear instead of the telephone numbers dialed: R Please Wait: the application is starting. If a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone is not established, the menu for authorizing and connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐ played on the multimedia system (/ page 333). R Updating Data…: the call list is being upda‐ ted. R Importing Contacts: contacts are being imported from the mobile phone or a storage medium. Accepting/rejecting an incoming call Vehicles with Head-up Display: when you receive a call, the Incoming Call message will appear on the Head-up Display. Instrument Display and on-board computer 227 # # Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control and select 6 (accept) or ~ (reject). Press the left-hand Touch Control. You may accept or reject the call using the 6 or ~ button on the steering wheel. Setting the Head-up Display using the onboard computer On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings can be selected: R Position R Brightness R Displays R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R Voice Control System # # # # # # To choose a setting: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. Settings menu 5 is selected. To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. To set messages, assistance status, tele‐ phone, audio and the Voice Control Sys‐ tem: press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed. Swipe upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting what the Head-up Display shows (Example) 1 To switch the Head-up Display on/off 2 Left display area Navigation system Average consumption G-meter 3 Central display area Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning 4 Right display area 228 Instrument Display and on-board computer Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display 5 To select the settings 6 Index points Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name, track or last calls will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. # To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand Touch Control. Display elements R R R Wet roadway Objects on the display cover Polarization in sunglasses % In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the Head-up Display. Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display 1 2 3 4 The Head-up Display projects information above the cockpit into the driver's field of vision, e.g. the speed of the vehicle, information from the navigation system or driver assistance systems and some warning messages. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three display areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 227). System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light Navigation instructions Current speed Detected instructions and traffic signs Set speed in the driver assistance system (e.g. cruise control) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD. The Head-up Display is activated. Voice Control System 229 Notes on operating safety & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # # # # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/load compartment. For your own safety, always observe the follow‐ ing points when operating mobile communica‐ tions equipment and especially your voice con‐ trol system: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐ try in which you are driving. R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐ cations equipment and your voice control system when the traffic conditions permit it. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions and cause an accident, injuring yourself and others. 230 Voice Control System R R R Conducting a dialog If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Comply with the loading guidelines (/ page 99). Operation Overview of operating the multifunction steering wheel The Voice Control System is operational approx‐ imately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on. 1 Press the rocker switch up: £ starts the dialog 2 Press the control knob: 8 switches the sound off or on (ends the dialog) Turn the control knob up/down: increases/ decreases the volume 3 Press the rocker switch down: ~ rejects/ ends a call (ends the dialog) For the dialog with the Voice Control System, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands, such as, for exam‐ ple, "Please show me the list of the last calls" or "How warm is it outside?". It is not necessary to first change to the relevant application such as "Telephone" or "Vehicle function". # To activate or continue dialog by using a keyword: say "Hello Mercedes" to activate the Voice Control System. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia sys‐ tem (/ page 231). For this, it is not neces‐ sary to press up the £ rocker switch on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice activation can also be directly com‐ bined with a voice command, e.g. "Hi Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". or # Press the £ rocker switch up on the mul‐ tifunction steering wheel. You can say a voice command after an acoustic signal. Voice Control System 231 # # # # # # # To correct an entry: say the Correction voice command. To select an entry from the selection list: say the line number or the contents. To browse the selection list: say the Next or Back voice command. To interrupt the dialog: say the Pause voice command. The dialog can be continued with the "Hello Mercedes" voice command or by pressing up the £ rocker switch on the multifunction steering wheel. To jump to the preceding dialog: say the Back voice command. To jump back to the top dialog level: say the Home voice command. To cancel the dialog: say the Close voice command or press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. To interrupt a voice output: speak in the middle of a voice dialog when the system is still answering. The voice output is shortened and the con‐ clusion is reached more quickly. % The Speak During Voice Output option must be switched on in the multimedia system for this (/ page 231). # Overview of operable functions in the Voice Control System You can use the Voice Control System to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text messages R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions R Weather Full functionality is only available for you with activation of online voice control (/ page 231). Notes on the language setting You can change the language of the Voice Con‐ trol System via the system language settings. If the set system language is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected. The Voice Control System is available in English, French, Portuguese and Spanish. Setting the Voice Control System (multime‐ dia system) Requirements: For online voice control: your vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account (/ page 354). R There is an Internet connection (/ page 358). R For online use of contacts: online voice control is activated. R 232 Voice Control System Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 LINGUATRONIC 5 System Switching voice activation of the Voice Con‐ trol System on/off # Select Voice Activation "Hey Mercedes". Depending on the previous status, the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. When the function is active, the "Hi Mercedes" voice command can activate the dialog. Activating/deactivating online voice control Activate Online Voice Control. # % Online voice control is activated at the fac‐ tory. # Select Online Voice Control Subscr.. You will be connected with the Mercedes me portal. # Activate online voice control in the Mercedes me portal. Activating contacts for online use Select Contacts for Online Use. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input. The quality of the enunciation of con‐ tact names by the system will also be improved. # Switching on voice interruption # Select Speak During Voice Output. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the sys‐ tem. Using the Voice Control System effectively Voice Control System audible help functions Using the corresponding voice commands you receive the following information and assistance in the following cases: R For optimal operation: say the Voice control tutorial voice command or call up the Digital Operator's Manual with Could you go to the Voice Control System tutorial please?, R R R for example. The full extent of the Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. Here you can also find explanatory videos which introduce you to the functions of the Voice Control System. Current application: on the multifunction steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch up and say the Help voice command. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of the Voice Control System for the current application. Continued dialog: say the Help voice com‐ mand during a voice dialog. For every step of the dialog you receive matching information. Specific function: say the voice command for the desired function, e.g. with "Hello Mercedes, I need help with the radio" or after pressing the £ rocker switch on the multi‐ function steering wheel up, say the Help for the telephone voice command, for example. Voice Control System 233 Notes on optimal use of the Voice Control System Notes on how to improve recognition: R Activate online voice control (/ page 231). R Only operate the Voice Control System from the driver's seat. R Say the voice commands coherently and clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. R Avoid loud noises that cause interference while making a voice command entry, e.g. the entertainment in the rear passenger compartment. R For telephone or address book entries: Only create sensible address book entries in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter surname and first name in the correct field. Do not use any abbreviations, unneces‐ sary spaces or special characters. R For radio station names: say the Read out station list voice command and say the desired station name in the way the voice output reads aloud to you. % To improve recognition, depending on the outside temperature, either the blowers for ventilation or heating are reduced when the Voice Control System is started. Information on online voice control Online voice control improves recognition and makes additional results available as a result of external information, e.g. information about POIs and about the weather. We therefore recom‐ mend that you activate online voice control. You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehi‐ cle (/ page 262). Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated (/ page 263). In addition, online voice control must be activa‐ ted (/ page 231). Essential voice commands Notes on the voice commands Aside from the exact voice commands (see the "Voice command" column in the following tables) to call up specific functions, in most cases the Voice Control System also understands a great many paraphrases from daily usage. Examples of these are listed in the "Colloquial examples" col‐ umn. For some languages however these exam‐ ples are only available to a limited extent. % Content in angled brackets, e.g. or , is a placeholder which has to be completed by you with the desired term. The voice command Set as intermediate destination could, for example, be completed with: Set Mercedes-Benz Arena as intermediate destination. Overview of switch voice commands Switch voice commands can be used to open certain applications. 234 Voice Control System Switch voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Switch to navigation I would like to go to navigation Switches to navigation Switch to address book I would like to switch to the address book Switches to the address book Switch to telephone I would like to switch to the phone Switches to the telephone Switch to messages Can you switch to messages please? Switches to the text message application Switch to radio I would like to switch to the radio Switches to radio Switch to media I would like to switch to the media application Switches to media Switch to comfort I would like to go to the comfort application Switches to the comfort settings Switch to vehicle info I would like to go to the vehicle application Switches to vehicle information Switch to settings I would like to go to the settings menu Switches to the menu with the setting options Voice Control System 235 % It is not necessary to first call up a menu in order to operate a function it contains with the Voice Control System. You can operate the function directly using voice input, e.g. call a contact or enter a destination for navi‐ gation. You can find further information in the overview tables for voice commands. Overview of navigation voice commands Using the navigation voice commands you can enter POIs and conventional addresses or navi‐ gate to your own contacts. You can also carry out important navigation settings directly. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation. Navigation voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Navigate to

Navigate to Canal Street, New York Starts route guidance to the desired address. Navigate to Drive/bring me to the contact address of John Doe Starts route guidance to a contact from the address book. 236 Voice Control System Voice command Colloquial example Function Navigate to <3 word address> The example is for the English lan‐ guage: Drive to Parade.Help.Bleat Starts route guidance to a 3 word address from what3words. The example mentioned navigates you to the Empire State Building. Observe the following information: R 3 word addresses are language dependent. R Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages. Additional information on 3 word addresses from what3words can be found in the Navigation section under "Entering the destination as a 3 word address". The Empire State Building, for example, has the following 3 word addresses: R English: parade.help.bleat R French: commun.verbe.bisquer R Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca Home I would like to go home/I want to drive to my home address Starts route guidance to the home address. Work I would like to navigate to work Starts route guidance to work. Enter POI Take me to a POI Enters a POI, e.g. Brandenburg Gate. Navigate to Navigate to "McDonald's" Starts route guidance to a POI. Voice Control System 237 Voice command Colloquial example Function Navigate to the online POI Navigate to online POI "McDonald's Searches online for a POI and starts route guidance. Start route guidance Begin route guidance/Can you start route guidance? Starts route guidance to a destination. Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance? Cancels route guidance. Restart route guidance I would like to resume route guidance Continues route guidance after a break. Set

as intermediate destination Set "9 Euclid Avenue in Cleveland" as an intermediate destination Selects an intermediate destination for the route. Set as intermediate destination Set "John Doe" as intermediate des- Selects an intermediate destination from the contacts for the route. tination Set as intermediate destination Set "Trump Tower" as an intermediate destination Selects a POI as an intermediate destination for the route. Enter address in I would like to enter a new address in "France" Selects a destination in another country. Enter ZIP code Start route guidance to a new ZIP code Enters a ZIP code. Last destinations Show the previous destinations Selects a destination from the previous destinations. 238 Voice Control System Voice command Colloquial example Function Show alternative routes Search for alternative routes Shows one of the alternative routes calculated. Driving recommendations on Switch on driving recommendations Switches on voice output for route guidance. Driving recommendations off Mute the driving instructions Switches off voice output for route guidance. Show traffic map Switch on traffic jam info Displays traffic information on the map. Hide traffic map Switch off the traffic jam messages Hides the traffic information. POI icons on Show me point of interest icons on the map please Displays the POI symbols on the map. Hide POI icons I would like to hide all POI symbols Hides the POI symbols. Overview of telephone voice commands You can use the telephone voice commands to make phone calls or search through the address book. The following list offers just a small selec‐ tion of the possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for phone. Voice Control System 239 Telephone voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Call I would like you to dial 0171xxxxxxx Makes a telephone call by entering the telephone number directly. Call Call Jane Smith on her mobile Makes a telephone call directly by entering a name from the address book. Call Mercedes-Benz emergency call center Could you call the Mercedes-Benz emergency center? Triggers an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. Call Mercedes me I’d like you to call the MB breakdown assistance please Places a call with Mercedes-Benz breakdown assistance. Latest calls Show me the list of missed calls Shows the list of missed calls. Previous calls Show me the last calls The list shows all outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Incoming calls Show me the calls received Shows the list of incoming calls. Outgoing calls Show me the list of outgoing calls Shows the list of outgoing calls. Search for Could you open the contact "John Doe"? Opens the contact data of a contact in the address book. 240 Voice Control System Voice command Colloquial example Function Redial Redial/Call last phone number Makes a call to the last telephone number dialed. Change phone Could you please switch to the second phone? Changes the primary telephone Overview of media player voice commands Media player voice commands can also be used when the media player application runs in the background and another application is visible in the foreground. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible media player voice commands. You will receive additional sug‐ gestions if you say Help for media or Help for player. Media player voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Play Play "Yellow Submarine" The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers or genres are accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result the track found is played back immediately. Play track Play song "So What" The available tracks are played back. Play album Play album "A Night at the Opera" The available albums are played back. Play artist I want to listen to the artist "Madonna" The available artists are played back. Voice Control System 241 Voice command Colloquial example Function Play composer I'd like to hear the composer "Ludwig van Beethoven" The available composers are played back. Play music genre I'd like to hear the music genre "Bebop" The available music genres are played back. Search for track I would like to search for the song "Sailing" The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search. A selec‐ tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for album Search for album "A Night at the Opera" The names of all available albums are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for artist I would like to search for the artist "Elton John" The names of all available artists are accepted during the search. A selec‐ tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for composer Search for composer "Beethoven" The names of all available composers are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Search for music genre Search for music genre "Classical" The names of all available music genres are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". 242 Voice Control System Voice command Colloquial example Function Next track Start the next song/video clip/film Plays back the next track. Previous track Play the last song/track/clip again Plays back the previous track. Repeat this track I'd like to listen to this track again The current track is played back from the beginning. Play similar music I'd like to hear similar music Plays back similar tracks. Play random music Play me a random track Plays back random tracks. Random playback on Turn random playback on Switches to random mode. Random track list off Switch off shuffle mode Switches off random mode. What am I listening to? Which music is currently playing? The information about the track currently playing is read aloud. Overview of message voice commands Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the message voice commands. The follow‐ ing list offers just a small selection of the possi‐ ble message commands. You will receive addi‐ tional suggestions if you say Help for messaging. Voice Control System 243 Message voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Text message to I would like to write a new text to "John Doe's mobile number" Creates a text message. All address book names are available. Text message to I would like you to write a new text to "Jane Doe" with the following text: "I am running late" Writes a text message to the person mentioned. The content of the text can be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated. Read out new text messages I would like you to read out the new text messages Reads out new text messages. Read out the last text message from I would like you to read out the last text message from "John Doe" Reads out the last text message from the person mentioned. Overview of vehicle voice commands You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle settings and operate vehicle functions. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for vehicle settings or Help for vehicle functions. % If no seat or side is mentioned for com‐ mands that relate to a seat or side of vehicle then all actions are carried out automatically for the driver's seat. 244 Voice Control System Vehicle voice commands Voice command Colloquial example Function Temperature colder I would like to reduce the temperature Lowers the temperature of the air conditioning system. Air recirculation on I would like to activate the air circulation Switches on air recirculation mode for the air conditioning system. Automatic climate control driver on I would like to switch on the automatic climate control for the driver's seat Switches on automatic climate control for the driver's or front passenger side. Ambient light blue I would like to set the interior lighting to blue Switches the ambiance light, e.g. to blue. Wave massage driver on I would like to switch on the wave massage for the driver's seat Switches on the wave massage for the driver's or front passenger seat. Massage driver's seat off Switch the driver's side massage off Switches off the massage function for the driver's or front passenger seat. Seat heating driver on I would like to switch on the seat heating for the driver's seat Switches on the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat. Seat heating front passenger level 2 Seat heating front-passenger on level 2 Sets the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat to level 2. Voice Control System 245 Voice command Colloquial example Function Current speed limit I would like to hear the speed limit Calls up the current speed limit. Outside temperature I would like to find out what the temperature outside is like Calls up the outside temperature. Average consumption What is the current average consumption? Calls up average consumption. Vehicle data Can you please display the vehicle data menu? Calls up the vehicle data. Range Tell me the current range Calls up the current range data. Assistance menu Show me the driver assistance settings Displays the assistance settings. Climate control menu I would like to see the climate control menu Displays the climate control settings. Light menu I would like to change the light settings Displays the light settings. Seats menu I would like to switch to seat menu Displays the seat adjustment settings. 246 Voice Control System Voice command Colloquial example Function Massage menu I would like to switch to the massage seat menu Displays the massage settings. Next service Tell me my next service appointment Calls up the next service due date. MBUX multimedia system 247 4 Control knob Overview and operation Overview of the MBUX multimedia system Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys‐ tem or media display on or off Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Turn: adjusts the volume 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone Calling up applications (/ page 260) 6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set‐ tings and favorites/themes Calling up applications (/ page 260) & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system Operating Touch Control(/ page 250) 2 Media display with touch functionality Home screen overview(/ page 249) Operating the touchscreen (/ page 251) 3 Touchpad Operating the touchpad(/ page 252) You can operate the MBUX multimedia system with these control elements: R Touch Control 1 and touchpad 3 The operation for both control elements is achieved by cursor control. R Media display 2 % Alternatively, you can conduct a dialog with the Voice Control System (/ page 230). Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. You can call 248 MBUX multimedia system these up using the home screen or using buttons 5 and 6 next to the touchpad. You can conveniently call up and add favorites using the ß rocker switch on the steering wheel or using the ß button next to the touchpad. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly. If you use the learn function of the multimedia system, you will receive suggestions during oper‐ ation of the most probable navigation destina‐ tions, radio stations and contacts. The configu‐ ration of the suggestions takes place in your pro‐ file. You can compile your profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. You can create themes for various driv‐ ing situations in the home screen as well as using the ß rocker switch or the ß but‐ ton. The Notifications Center collects incoming notifi‐ cations, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. You can call up the Notifications Center on the home screen and in the applica‐ tion menus. With the global search in the vehicle you can search on-board across many categories as well as online in the Internet. You can use the global search in the home screen and in the notifica‐ tions. Protection against theft This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Notes on the media display Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 397). Automatic temperature-controlled switchoff feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The media display may then switch off completely for a while. % If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it may be difficult to read the multimedia sys‐ tem display. MBUX multimedia system 249 Home screen overview 1 On the home screen: displays the first three applications In other displays: calls up the home screen 2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY display only when the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not available 5 Displays, for example network display, bat‐ tery status of the mobile phone connected, signal strength of the mobile phone network, time 6 Calls up the Notifications Center The star indicates new notifications. 7 Calls up an application using the symbol 8 Name of the application, beneath the current selection or information 9 Quick-access (in the example: calls up desti‐ nation entry, enters the destination address for home) A Number of applications and currently selec‐ ted display area 250 MBUX multimedia system B Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 127) C Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVORITES Central control elements overview Touch Control Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system) 1 Touch Control 2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Touchpad 1 © button Shows the home screen and calls up appli‐ cations MBUX multimedia system 251 Shows suggestions, themes and favorites: when the home screen is shown, swipe down on Touch Control 2. 2 Touch Control 3 G button Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐ play 4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system: ß rocker switch Press down briefly: shows favorites Press down and hold: adds favorites and themes Control knob Turn: adjusts the volume VOL Press: switches off the sound 8 6 rocker switch Press up: makes or accepts a call ~ rocker switch Press down: rejects or ends a call You can navigate in menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 by using a single-finger swipe. # # # # To select the menu item or entry: swipe up, down, left or right. Press Touch Control 2. To enter a character: enter a character using the keyboard. To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls 5 Touch Control Sensitivity # Select Fast, Medium or Slow. Setting acoustic operating feedback for the Touch Control Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls The function is supported by the selection in a list. # Select Acoustic Operating Feedback. # Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Touchscreen Operating the touchscreen Tapping To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry. # To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger. # To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐ gers. # To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button. # Single-finger swipe To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. # 252 MBUX multimedia system # # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. Two-finger swipe To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. # To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. # To turn the map: turn counter-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers. # Touching, holding and moving # To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction. # To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. Touching and holding To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown. # To call up a global menu in the applica‐ tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the OPTIONS menu appears. # Setting acoustic operation feedback for the touchscreen Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls The function is supported by the selection in a list. # Select Acoustic Operating Feedback. # Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Touchpad Operating the touchpad 1 G button Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐ play 2 ~ button Pressing: calls up the control menu of the last active audio source MBUX multimedia system 253 Swiping to the left of right across ~: selects the previous or next radio station/ music track 3 © button Pressing: shows the home screen and calls up applications 4 Touchpad % Calls up suggestions, themes and favorites: when the home screen is shown, swipe down on touchpad 4. You can navigate in menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of touchpad 4 by using a single-finger swipe. # To select the menu item or entry: swipe up, down, left or right. # Press touchpad 4. # To enter a character: enter a character using the keyboard. or # Write a character on the touchpad. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe: # To call up the Notifications Center: swipe down with two fingers. # To close the Notifications Center: swipe up with two fingers. # To call up the control menu of the last active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐ gers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. # To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls 5 Touchpad Sensitivity # Select Fast, Medium or Slow. # To set the pressure sensitivity: switch Touchpad Tap on or off. If the function is switched on, a tap on the touchpad is enough to select a menu item. Switching the read-aloud function for hand‐ writing recognition on/off Requirements: R The multimedia system is equipped with a voice control system. R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio # Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on or off. If the function is activated, characters are read aloud as they are written on the touch‐ pad. 254 MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating haptic operating feedback for the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls The function supports you when making entries on the touchpad and when selecting menus. # Switch Haptic Operating Feedback on or off. When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐ back in the form of a vibration is effected when the touchpad is operated. Setting acoustic operating feedback for the touchpad Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls The function is supported by the selection in a list. # Select Acoustic Operating Feedback. # Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Selecting a station and track using the touchpad # Swipe to the left or right over the ~ but‐ ton. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or next track is selected. or # To show the control menu: press the ~ button on the touchpad. or # Swipe upwards using two fingers on the touchpad. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected. # Swipe left or right using one finger. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or next track is selected. # To hide the control menu: swipe down on the touchpad using two fingers. MBUX Interior Assistant Notes on lasers and laser classification & WARNING Risk of injury from laser radi‐ ation from the camera This product uses a laser system. If the hous‐ ing is opened or damaged, invisible laser beams can escape in an uncontrolled man‐ ner. Laser radiation can damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. MBUX multimedia system 255 & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. In addi‐ tion, the reading light or search light can be switched on or off contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions. The MBUX Interior Assistant recognizes certain hand positions (poses). 256 MBUX multimedia system The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions: Interaction area Interaction Description In front of the media display/above the touch‐ pad Proximity to the control element The MBUX Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a control element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required. Above the center console Defined poses With defined poses a function is triggered depending on the application active. Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off. Front passenger seat Stretching out the hand above the front passenger seat By stretching out the hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If the hand is withdrawn from this area, the search light is switched off again. Operating functions by proximity of the hand to the touchscreen and touchpad Requirements: R One of the following applications appears in the media display: - - Seat settings with displays for the driver and front passenger seat, e.g. Seat Comfort Home screen MBUX multimedia system 257 Radio menu or media menu Map in the navigation Active Parking Assist Recognition occurs as the hand approaches to approximately 4 in (10 cm) from the touch‐ pad or the touchscreen. - # R Seat adjustments by the driver or front passenger In the seat settings menu, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects proximity to various control elements of the multimedia system. In addition, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects from which seat the action emanates. # Hand approaching the touchscreen Hand approaching the touchpad With the seat setting display active, move the hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad. The seat of the person operating, driver's seat or front passenger seat, is enlarged in the media display. The appropriate control elements are preselected automatically. Depending on the function, the person oper‐ ating can either switch the function on or off directly or make other settings. Highlighting an application on the home screen The MBUX Interior Assistant detects in which area the hand is in front of the touchscreen. The display of objects shown is adjusted to improve orientation. # Move a hand towards the touchscreen. The symbol for the application is enlarged. The quick-access applications will be high‐ lighted. # Continue operation, e.g. select a quickaccess application. % Further information about the home screen (/ page 249). 258 MBUX multimedia system Activating cover change in the radio menu and media menu The MBUX Interior Assistant reduces the number of operating steps. # Move a hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad. The current information, e.g. about the radio station, track and artist are hidden. Cover change is activated. # Continue operation and select a cover. # As the hand is moved away from the touchscreen or touchpad, the current infor‐ mation is shown again. % Further information on the radio menu (/ page 373) and the media menu (/ page 368). Showing the navigation menu on the map The MBUX Interior Assistant shows the naviga‐ tion menu. # Move a hand towards the touchscreen or touchpad. The navigation menu is shown. # Continue operation and select a symbol. As the hand is moved away from the touchscreen or touchpad, the media display hides the navigation menu. % Further information on the navigation menu (/ page 290). # Showing operating symbols in the Active Parking Assist camera image (only from driv‐ er's seat) The MBUX Interior Assistant facilitates quickaccess for the driver to various camera views. # With the Active Parking Assist display active, move the hand in the direction of the touchscreen. The camera operation symbols are displayed. # Continue operation and display the desired front, rear, left and right camera views. % Further information on Active Parking Assist functions (/ page 199). Operating a function with the favorites pose Requirements: R To call up favorites: there is at least one favorite. R R The area for recognition of the favorite's pose is above the center console at the height of the climate control vents and the media display. The hand should have a dis‐ tance of at least 4 in (10 cm) from the media display. The pose is held for a brief time. Calling up favorites A pose calls up a favorite. The driver and front passenger can connect two different favorites with the V pose. % If a favorite has not yet been saved and con‐ nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you. MBUX multimedia system 259 Briefly moving the hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror switches the reading light specifically for the driver or front passenger on or off. R R The gesture is completed in the interaction area (front-passenger seat). The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. Stretching out with the hand over the front passenger seat when unoccupied switches a search light on for the driver when it is dark. Pulling the hand back switches the search light off again. Carrying out the V pose # Position the hand above the center console and in the direction of the media display. The back of the hand is facing upwards. In doing so the index and middle finger are extended with the other fingers bent inwards. The favorite is called up. Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off using gesture mode Requirements: R The function is available when it is dark. R The gesture is carried out in the interaction area (under the inside rearview mirror). Carrying out operation of the reading light # Move the hand up and down vertically under the reading light. The reading light is switched on or off. Switching the search light for the driver on/off using gesture mode Requirements: R The front passenger seat is not occupied. R The function is available when it is dark. Interaction area for operating the search light # To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with your hand. The search light is switched on for the driver. 260 MBUX multimedia system # To switch off: take your hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again. Settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Interior Assistant # To switch on full functionality of the MBUX Interior Assistant: select On. The option is activated #. # To activate additional functions for read‐ ing and search lights: select Including Reading Light. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated. The functions for the reading and search lights are activated in addition to the proxim‐ ity functions. # To switch off the MBUX Interior Assis‐ tant: select Off. The option is activated #. Main functions Calling up applications 1 y button Calls up vehicle functions 2 z button Calls up navigation 3 | button Calls up radio or media 4 % button Calls up the telephone 5 ß button Press briefly: calls up favorites (/ page 268) Press and hold: adds a favorite (/ page 268) or creates a new theme (/ page 265) Alternatively in the home screen: when you start the vehicle the home screen is shown in the media display. # Select the application by swiping and tap‐ ping. or # In any display: press the © button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. or # Tap on the © symbol on the touchscreen. The applications are displayed. # Select the application by swiping and tap‐ ping. Changing the arrangement of applications on the home screen # Call up the home screen. MBUX multimedia system 261 # # # Touch and hold an application on the touchscreen until symbols appear. Tap on = or ; and move the applica‐ tion in the menu. Tap on ø. Profile Notes on profiles & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu‐ pants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the media display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap‐ ment feature. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Overview of profiles Using the multimedia system up to seven pro‐ files can be created in the vehicle. Profiles store your personal vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their profile before the journey, without changing the settings of other drivers. You can select the profile: R When entering (/ page 264) R Using the home screen (/ page 249) The profile settings are activated as soon as a profile is selected. % If you call up your profile when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjus‐ ted. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Tap on the Positioning Seat and Steering Wheel… Please tap to cancel. warning on the media display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. Profile content Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ ing settings can be stored in your profile, for example: R Driver's seat memory R Radio (including station list) 262 MBUX multimedia system R R R R R R Last destinations Climate control Ambient lighting DYNAMIC SELECT I (individual) Instrument Display, Head-up Display and style (display style of the multimedia system) Themes, suggestions and favorites % Settings for driver assistance systems can‐ not be saved in the profile. Mercedes me connect profile If you use a profile from Mercedes me connect, the following online functions are available, for example: R You can configure the settings in the vehicle using the Mercedes me app and the Mercedes me portal. R You can synchronize your profile on Mercedes me connect with the profile in the vehicle (/ page 263). R You can add a personal profile photo that is shown in the vehicle. You can take your profile and some of your settings with you in new vehicles. # Requirements for using Mercedes me con‐ nect profiles: For the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The personalization service is activated. # R For additional users of the vehicle: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle owner has invited you to connect your user account on Mercedes me with that of his vehicle. R You have accepted the invitation. Creating a new profile Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles # Select W Create Profile. # Select an avatar. # # Enter the name and confirm with a. Select Continuer. To save the current settings in a profile: select Current Settings. Select Save. or To adopt the factory settings: select Factory Settings. # Select Save. % Further information on setting a user profile (/ page 263). # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile (/ page 333). # You can also set up a user profile without regis‐ tering a mobile phone. # Select Finish. The user profile is saved. MBUX multimedia system 263 Selecting profile options Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles # Select Ä for a profile. # To edit a profile: select Edit Profile. # Select an avatar. # Change the name, if necessary. # Select Save. # To configure suggestions: select Suggestion Settings (/ page 267). # To reset favorites or themes: select Reset Favorite to Factory Settings or Reset Themes to Factory Settings. # Select Yes. # To reset a profile: select Reset Profile to Factory Settings. # Select Yes. # To delete a profile: select Delete Profile. # Select Yes. % The guest profile cannot be deleted. Protecting profile content To protect your profile content and settings you can create a PIN in the Mercedes me portal for your profile. When PIN protection is active, you have to enter the PIN to select your profile. # Select Protect Content. # Select Mercedes me Portal. The browser opens and you are transferred to the Mercedes me portal. Selecting a profile Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles % You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Tap on the Positioning Seat and Steering Wheel… Please tap to cancel. warning on the media display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. # Select a profile. # Press the a button to confirm the mes‐ sage. The profile is loaded and activated. % Alternatively, the profile can already be selected when the vehicle is entered (/ page 264). Synchronizing a profile Requirements: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. R The personalization service is activated on Mercedes me connect. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles 5 General Settings Synchronization enables the following: R You can configure the vehicle settings using the Mercedes me app. R The profile on Mercedes me connect and the profile in the vehicle are aligned (profile man‐ agement). # Activate Synchronize Profiles Automatically. The profiles in the vehicle are automatically synchronized with the profiles on Mercedes 264 MBUX multimedia system me connect when the ignition is switched on and off. or Select Synchronize Profiles Now. After selecting this option, the profiles in the vehicle are synchronized with the profiles on Mercedes me connect. % During synchronization the profile list and the profile functions are blocked. % Note on data protection: if you do not wish to share your data with Mercedes me, make sure that the automatic synchronization is switched off and do not select Synchronize Profiles Now. # Showing the profile selection when entering Requirements: R At least one profile has been created. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles If the option is activated, you can see a profile as soon as you get in. # Select General Settings. # Activate Show Profile Selection When Getting In. When the vehicle is started, the media dis‐ play shows the active profile. Themes Overview of themes You can configure the vehicle settings according to your preferences and save as a theme. A theme can be called up any time via the home screen. There is then no need to make the desired settings again. There are pre-defined themes available, e.g. Journey, Efficiency and Lounge. Example for the use of themes For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer‐ red settings in a theme in the vehicle. You can save the following settings in a theme, for example: R Displays (e.g. navigation map or tachometer) R Preferred radio station R Favored drive program These settings are saved under the name you wish when setting up a theme (/ page 265). On the next freeway journey you can select this theme and thereby restore your settings. Content of a theme Depending on vehicle equipment the following settings can be saved in a theme: R Setting of the Instrument Display (/ page 215) R Setting of the Head-up Display (/ page 227) R Setting of the ambient lighting (/ page 118) R Active audio source, e.g. radio or USB R Starting screen for the media display R Visual style (/ page 281) R DYNAMIC SELECT drive program (/ page 140) R Eco start/stop setting (/ page 138) R Navigation system settings % A theme contains the currently active set‐ tings in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system 265 Calling up themes Multimedia system: 4 © # When the home screen is shown, swipe up until THEMES appears. # Select a theme. Creating new themes Requirements: R The settings which are to be saved in the theme are active. The overview shows the settings which can be saved in a theme (/ page 264). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 THEMES # Select W Create Theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r. # Select additional settings which are to be saved in the theme. R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐ tings in the theme. Select Navigation (Navigation), to save the active navigation settings in the theme. Select Continue r. Select an entry screen. Select Continue r. Select an image. Enter the names into the entry field and con‐ firm with a. To save a theme: select Save. R # # # # # # When the maximum number that can be saved is reached: # Select a from the prompt. # Select a theme that should be overwritten. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r. # Select additional settings which are to be saved in the theme. R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐ tings in the theme. Select Navigation (Navigation), to save the active navigation settings in the theme. Select Continue r. Select an entry screen. Select Continue r. Select an image. Enter the names into the entry field and con‐ firm with a. To save a theme: select Save. R # # # # # # Creating using the ß rocker switch or but‐ ton # Press and hold the bottom section of the ß rocker switch on the steering wheel. or # Press and hold the ß button next to the touchpad. # Select W Create Theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown. # Select Continue r. 266 MBUX multimedia system # # # # # Select additional settings which are to be saved in the theme. R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐ tings in the theme. R Select Navigation (Navigation), to save the active navigation settings in the theme. Select Continue r. Select an image. Enter the names into the entry field and con‐ firm with a. To save a theme: select Save. Modifying themes Multimedia system: 4 © # When the home screen is shown, swipe up until THEMES appears. # Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Rename. # Enter the name. # Select Save✓. Moving themes Multimedia system: 4 © # When the home screen is shown, swipe up until THEMES appears. # Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Move. # Tap on = or ;. # Tap on ø. Moving the themes menu in the home screen # Select ©. # Swipe upwards and select Set New Order. # Select Themes. # Tap on 9 or :. # Tap on ø. Deleting themes Multimedia system: 4 © # When the home screen is shown, swipe up until THEMES appears. # Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. Suggestions Suggestions overview The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. Based on previously used functions, the most likely navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts are offered under SUGGESTIONS. Suggestions are shown when the following requirements are fulfilled: R A profile has been created (/ page 262). R A profile has been selected. R You have accepted data recording. MBUX multimedia system 267 R From the beginning of usage, the multimedia system must analyze the user habits. When sufficient data is collected then the sugges‐ tions are available. If the requirements mentioned are not fulfilled, a preview with a description of the function appears in the SUGGESTIONS menu. You can configure data recording (/ page 267) or delete the suggestions recorded (/ page 268). Calling up suggestions Requirements: R A profile has been created and is selected (/ page 263). # # # Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown. Select a navigation destination, a media source, a radio station or a contact. If route guidance is already active, you can‐ not start a new route guidance or set an intermediate destination for the existing route. # Configuring suggestions Requirements: R To protect settings using a PIN: your pro‐ file is connected with Mercedes me and your Mercedes me account is PIN protected. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f Profiles # Select u for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # To switch suggestions display on/off: switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Suggestions on or off. If an option is switched on, suggestions for navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts are shown. If the option is switched off, no suggestions are shown. # To deactivate the learn function for one day: activate 24h Learning Deact.. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. The remaining time is shown next to 24h Learning Deact.. Before the time runs out, a message is shown that the multimedia system will con‐ tinue the learn function shortly. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula‐ ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learn function. To reset the suggestion history: select Reset Suggestion History. % This process cannot be reversed. # Select Yes. # To protect settings with a PIN: switch on PIN Protection. If PIN protection is switched on, you must enter the Mercedes me PIN to set the sug‐ gestions. This PIN will be set in the Mercedes 268 MBUX multimedia system me portal for the personalization service to protect your personal settings. Renaming suggestions Only navigation destinations can be renamed. # Tap on the © symbol in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown. # Highlight a navigation destination and press until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Rename. # Enter the name. # To confirm the entry: select Yes. Deleting a suggestion Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown. # Highlight a suggestion and press until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # # # # Select Delete. The query as to whether the suggestion is deleted temporarily or permanently appears. If the suggestion should be shown again at a later time: select Not Now. If the suggestion should not be shown again: select Never. Favorites Overview of favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favorites in total. You can select favorites from categories or you add favorites directly from an application. Calling up favorites In the media display Tap on ©. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # On the steering wheel or the touchpad Press the ß rocker switch on the steering wheel down. or # Press the ß button next to the touchpad. # Adding favorites Selecting favorites from categories # Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Select W Create Favorite. The categories are displayed. # Select the category. The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. The favorite is stored at the next available position. # All positions in the favorites are taken: confirm the message shown with OK. A list shows all the favorites. # Select a favorite which should be overwrit‐ ten. MBUX multimedia system 269 Adding a favorite from an application Examples of adding from an application are: R Saving a contact. R Storing a radio station. R Adding a media source. R Saving a navigation destination. R Adding an ENERGIZING comfort program (if available). # # # # # # To save a contact as a global favorite: select a contact (/ page 339). The details are displayed. Press on a telephone number until the OPTIONS menu is shown. Select Save as Favorite. The contact is added as a favorite. To store a radio station as a global favor‐ ite: set a radio station (/ page 374). Press on the radio station until the OPTIONS menu is shown. Select Save as Favorite. The radio station is added as a favorite. Renaming favorites Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Rename. # Enter the name. # Select OK. Moving the favorites menu in the personali‐ zation # Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until Set New Order is shown. # Select Set New Order. # Move Favorites to the new position. # Tap on ø. Moving favorites # # Moving favorites in the favorites menu Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Move. # Move the favorite to the new position. # Tap on ø. # Deleting favorites Tap on © in the media display. The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. 270 MBUX multimedia system Notifications Center Overview of the Notifications Center The following communications are collected in the Notifications Center: R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from multimedia system. R Communications which are received through the use of services. The following notification types are available for you: R Navigable destinations and routes R Messages (text messages) R System information, e.g. Important Software Update Available R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be subscribed to The 3 Notifications Center can be found on the home screen, in menus and at the top right of the navigation map (/ page 249). Newly received messages will be indicated with a star in the 3 symbol. Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. This occurs for nearly every appli‐ cation that you are currently using. If you take no action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Center. The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are at the top. A notification shows the following information: R Symbol or image 1 for the application R Title 2, which contains the name, a tele‐ phone number or a navigation destination, for example R The service and additional information 3 R R A time stamp 5 If several actions are available, symbol 4 to open or close the notification. Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions 6 are available. Examples of actions include: R Read aloud R Placing a call R Reply R Calling up a web page R Navigation Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly on the receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. % You can start a global search in the Notifica‐ tions Center (/ page 272). MBUX multimedia system 271 Calling up notifications Opening the Notifications Center # On the touchpad: swipe down with two fin‐ gers. or # On the touchscreen: tap on the 3 sym‐ bol for the Notifications Center. or # On the Touch Control and on the touch‐ pad: mark the 3 symbol for the Notifica‐ tions Center by swiping. # Press on the control element. Selecting a notification # Swipe up or down. # Tap or press on the control element. Calling up old notifications If notifications have not been called up after four hours, these are stored in the archive. # Swipe upwards and select Archive. # Select the notification. Closing the Notifications Center On the touchpad: swipe up with two fingers. # Selecting actions for a notification The following options are available: R Select the action directly in an application after a notification is received and shown. R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Center. # # # # # An action is available: select the action. Several actions are available: if the notifi‐ cation is not open, select the V symbol. Select the action. The notification is still available. If Additional information is available, select the action. Additional information is shown in a window as text, image or text and image. To close the window: select OK. Editing notifications Call up the Notifications Center (/ page 271). # To make settings: select Z. % If no settings can be made, a message appears. # Select the service. # Switch the options on or off. The following options are available: R Allow Notifications R Display in Notification Center R Show Notifications R Acoustic Notifications # When Allow Notifications is switched on, the other options cannot be selected. To delete: touch a message on the touchscreen and slide to the left or right. or # # # # Select E. Select Delete or Delete All. Delete deletes a single notification. Delete All deletes all notifications currently shown. With O you will exit delete mode. 272 MBUX multimedia system Global search Global search overview You can use the global search in the home screen and in the notifications. The global search provides search results for the following categories: R Navigation R Entertainment R Telephone, social media R User interface and Digital Operator's Manual R Internet This enables you to search for cities, roads and tourist attractions with the navigation system, for example. % You can also search for 3 word addresses (/ page 297). When you enter a 3 word address in the global search, separate each of the words with a space or a full stop. During the entry process the most likely sugges‐ tions are shown beneath the search field. When you enter "S", "Stuttgart", "Steak" and "Sandra" are shown, for example. If you select "Stuttgart", you receive the suggestions "Starbucks", "Steak" and "City railway", for example. The search results in the list are shown, sorted according to category. Next to the category is the number of results. You will be shown the best results from each category. Additional results can be found after selecting the respec‐ tive category. If you confirm an entry with OK, all categories and the number of results will be shown in a summary. After selecting a category you can select the search results within the category. When you select a search result the detailed view opens. In the detailed view you can choose whether and which actions you want to carry out with the respective search result. For example, you can start route guidance or place a call to somebody. The actions are named correspond‐ ingly. The search can be carried out with the following input methods: R Entering characters using the on-screen key‐ pad R R Entering characters with handwriting recog‐ nition Dictation function Using the global search Multimedia system: 4 © # Select ª Search. or # Call up the notifications (/ page 271). # Select Search. # Enter the search term into the search field. During the entry process the three most likely suggestions are offered beneath the search field. In the list on the right, the top two search results are shown for each category. % Use the character input function Alternatively, you can use the p dictation function for the search. MBUX multimedia system 273 # # # # # # # # To accept a suggestion: select the sugges‐ tion. The three most likely suggestions are offered. Continue the search or accept a suggestion. To accept the second search result: select the search result. An action starts or a list is shown. Select a search result or an action in the list. To show all categories: select OK. To show search results for a category: select a category. To show details: select a search result. To start an action: select an action. After selection of an action, a track is played back or the route to a destination is calcula‐ ted, for example. Switching the sound on/off On the multimedia system On the multifunction steering wheel # To mute: press volume control 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the media display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted. 274 MBUX multimedia system # To switch on: turn volume control 1 or change the media source. R during a telephone call Setting in the menu # Press the © button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. # Select Settings. # Select System. # Select Audio. # Select a volume setting. # Set the volume. Adjusting the volume Adjusting with the control knob Entering characters Using the character input function On the multimedia system # On the multifunction steering wheel Turn volume control 1. The volume of the current volume group (e.g. entertainment) is set. The volume of other groups can be adjusted separately. Adjust the volume in the following situations: R during a traffic announcement R during a navigation announcement & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system 275 # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Requirements: R For the handwriting recognition readaloud function: the multimedia system is equipped with a voice control system. R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. R The handwriting recognition read-aloud func‐ tion is activated. Character entry can be carried out with these control elements: R Touch Control R R Touchscreen (media display) Touchpad Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another. # When the keypad is shown, enter the charac‐ ters on the control element by swiping and pressing or by tapping (touchscreen). or # Write the characters on the touchpad or the touchscreen. The touchpad supports character input with the following functions: R Handwriting recognition offers character sug‐ gestions. R If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then the entered characters are read aloud. Examples of character entry: Renaming a favorite R R R R Looking for search results in the global search. Entering a destination address in the naviga‐ tion system Entering a web address Entering characters on the touchpad Requirements: R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐ writing recognition is switched on (/ page 253). R An online connection is required for some functions. 276 MBUX multimedia system Using the keyboard Input line Shows suggestions during input (if available) Deletes an entry Deletes Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 5 Accepts an entry 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 A Switches to handwriting input Enters a space Changes the keyboard language Switches to special characters Switches to digits and additional special characters ABC Switches to letters (level 2) B Pressing or pressing briefly switches between upper-case and lower-case letters Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input. % When Touchpad Tap is switched on D, tapping is sufficient to select a character or an option (/ page 253). # Call up the character entry to rename a favorite, for example (/ page 269). MBUX multimedia system 277 # # # Select the character by swiping and pressing. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2. To select a suggestion: select one of the entries. Resume character input. Using handwriting input 1 Input line 2 Shows suggestions during input # # # To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character. Select the character. To end character input: press the G but‐ ton. 3 Deletes an entry 4 Deletes % The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level. % Entry using the keyboard can also be com‐ pleted using the Touch Control. Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 278 MBUX multimedia system 5 6 7 8 Enters a space Switches to input using the keyboard Accepts an entry Writes characters on the drawing surface If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input. % When Touchpad Tap is switched on D, tapping is sufficient to select an option (/ page 253). # Call up the character entry to rename a favorite, for example (/ page 269). # # # # When the keyboard is displayed, select v. Write the character on the touchpad with a finger. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2. To select a suggestion: select one of the entries. Resume character input. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other. # To end character input: press the G but‐ ton. Entering characters on the touchscreen Requirements: R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐ writing recognition is switched on (/ page 253). R An online connection is required for some functions. MBUX multimedia system 279 Using the keyboard Input line Shows suggestions during input (if available) Deletes an entry Deletes Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 5 Accepts an entry 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 A Switches to handwriting input Enters a space Changes the keyboard language Switches to special characters Switches to digits and additional special characters ABC Switches to letters (level 2) B Pressing or pressing briefly switches between upper-case and lower-case letters Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input. # Call up the character entry to rename a favorite, for example (/ page 269). The keyboard is shown. 280 MBUX multimedia system # # # Briefly press on a character. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2. To select a suggestion: select one of the entries. If available, display additional suggestions with q or r. # Using handwriting input 2 Shows suggestions during input 3 Deletes an entry 1 Input line # # # Resume character input. To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character. Select the character. To end character entry: press briefly on G. % The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level. 4 Deletes MBUX multimedia system 281 Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 5 Enters a space 6 Switches to input using the keyboard 7 Accepts an entry 8 Writes characters on the drawing surface If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input. # Call up the character entry to rename a favorite, for example (/ page 269). # When the keyboard is displayed, select v. # Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2. # To select a suggestion: select one of the entries. # If available, display additional suggestions with q or r. # # Resume character input. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other. To end character entry: press briefly on G. Setting the keyboard for character entry Multimedia system: 4 Settings 5 System 5 Controls 5 Keyboards and Handwriting # Confirm Select keyboards. Select the keyboard language in the list. System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Designs & Display Setting the design # Select Designs. # # Select Classic, Sport or Progressive. The multimedia system display changes depending on the style selected. If you revert to the factory settings, the Classic style is set. To adjust the ambient lighting to a style: select Ambient Lighting Adjustment. This function adjusts the ambient lighting for the selected display style. Setting the display brightness # Select Display Brightness. # Select a brightness value. Switching the display off/on Off: select Display Off. # On: press a button, %, for example. # Selecting the display design Select Day/Night Design. # Select Automatic, Day Design or Night Design. # 282 MBUX multimedia system Switching the temperature display on/off # Select Temperature Display. # Select Outside Temp. or Coolant Temp.. The selected temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster. Time and date Setting the time and date automatically Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and Date # Deactivate Manual Time Adjustment. The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone and summer time option. % The correct time is required for the following functions: R Route guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance. R Calculation of expected time of arrival. Setting the time zone Requirements: R For the manual time zone: Automatic Time Zone is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Time and Date 5 System Setting the time zone manually # Select Time Zone:. The list of countries is displayed. % If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the coun‐ try is selected. # Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time Zone:. Setting the time zone automatically # Activate Automatic Time Zone. Setting the time and date format Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and Date 5 Set Format # Set the date and time format #. Setting the time and date manually Requirements: R The Manual Time Adjustment function is switched on. R For setting the date manually: no GPS is installed in the vehicle. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Time and Date 5 System Setting the time (without time zone) Select Set Time. # Set a time. # Setting the time (with time zone) # Select Set Time. MBUX multimedia system 283 If a time zone is set the time is set automatically using the time zone. The time can be adjusted by a maximum of plus or minus 60 minutes. # Adjust the time using the slide control. Setting the date # Select Set Date. # Set a date. % In vehicles with GPS, a date cannot be set even with active manual time adjustments. The date is then set automatically through the selected time zone. Bluetooth® Information about Bluetooth® Bluetooth® technology is a standard for shortrange wireless data transfer up to approximately 32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth® to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the fol‐ lowing functions, for example: R Hands-free system with access to the follow‐ ing options: R R R - Wi-Fi - Wi-Fi connection overview You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or other network devices. The following connection options are available: R Wi-Fi connection The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or a tablet PC is established. R Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook can be connected, for example. The connec‐ ted device can use the data tariff of the vehi‐ cle. A maximum of three devices can be con‐ nected with the hotspot at the same time. contacts (/ page 338) call lists (/ page 341) Internet connection (/ page 358) Listening to music via Bluetooth® audio (/ page 369) Transferring business cards (vCards) into the vehicle Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. % Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all countries. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # Switch Bluetooth on or off. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐ lowing methods: R WPS PIN 284 MBUX multimedia system R R The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a PIN. WPS PBC The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made by pressing a button (push button). Security key The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a security key. Setting up Wi-Fi Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul‐ timedia system with new devices: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports one of the three means of connection described. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 System Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots. If Wi-Fi is deactivated, communication via Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also means that a connection to the communication module cannot be established. Then some functions such as dynamic route guidance with Live Traffic Information are not availa‐ ble. Connecting the multimedia system with a new device via Wi-Fi This function is available if a communication module is not installed. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐ # # # tions that are shown in the display. Further information (see the manufacturer's operat‐ ing instructions). Select Internet Settings. Select Connect via Wi-Fi. Select Add Hotspot. Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐ tem. # Confirm the entry with ¡. % All devices support a security key as a means of connection. Connecting using a WPS PIN Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # MBUX multimedia system 285 # # # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. Confirm the entry. Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the man‐ ufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system. Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection. Connecting with a known Wi-Fi Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. # # Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth Configuring the multimedia system as a WiFi hotspot The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec‐ tion established must be selected on the multi‐ media system and on the device to be connec‐ ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and confirm. Connecting using WPS PIN entry Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. # Connecting using a button Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue. # Connecting using a security key Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MB Hotspot XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry. # 286 MBUX multimedia system Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of the vehicle (/ page 335). # Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐ lished, the new security key must be entered. System language Setting the distance unit Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan‐ guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan‐ guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ tion announcements will be in English. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Units # Select km or mi. # In the multifunction display of the Instrument Display, switch the Additional Speedometer display on. Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 ® Language # Set the language. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Naviga‐ tion announcements are then also made in Arabic. Data import and export Data import/export function The following functions are possible: R Transferring data from one system or vehicle to another system or vehicle. R Creating a backup copy of your personal data and loading it again. R Protecting your personal data against unwan‐ ted export with PIN protection. % Please note that the NTFS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐ mended. MBUX multimedia system 287 Importing/exporting data * NOTE Loss of data due to premature removal # Do not remove the data storage medium when data is being exported. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on. R A USB device is connected. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 System Backup # Select Import Data or Export Data. Importing # Select a data storage medium. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to overwrite the current data. If data # originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐ nized during data reading. Confirm the prompt. The files are imported. The multimedia system is restarted once the data has been imported. % Current vehicle settings can be edited after the import. Exporting If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐ ted. # Enter the four-digit PIN. # Select a data storage medium. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to carry out the export. # Confirm the prompt. The data is exported. The data export may take several minutes. % After successful export, the data is saved in the "MyMercedesBackup" directory which can be found on the storage medium. Activating/deactivating PIN protection Requirements: R To unlock the PIN: there is an Internet con‐ nection. R A Mercedes me account exists at http:// www.mercedes.me. R An individual user profile is active (/ page 263). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 PIN Protection 5 System Setting the PIN # Select Set PIN. # Enter a four-digit PIN. # Enter the four-digit PIN again. If both PINs match, PIN protection is active. Changing the PIN Select Change Settings. # Enter the current PIN. # Select Change PIN. # 288 MBUX multimedia system # Set a new PIN. Activating PIN protection for data export Select Protect Data Export. Activate or deactivate the function. # Unblocking the PIN via the Mercedes me por‐ tal If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a single-use password sent to you via the Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the PIN protection. # Select Unlock PIN. # Enter the single-use password. PIN protection is reset, and you can set a new PIN. Software update Information on software updates A software update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the update R Activation of the update by restarting the system The multimedia system provides a message when an update is available. Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐ ous updates: Software updates Source of the update Update type Internet Navigation map, sys‐ tem updates, Digital Operator's Manual External storage medium, e.g. USB flash drive Navigation maps % Installation can take several minutes and cancellation is not possible. If you do not install the software updates then the status of your vehicle will not be up-to-date. During the installation, individual functions or con‐ trol elements are not available or only availa‐ ble to a limited degree. Advantages of updating software Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐ ogy is up-to-date. In order to improve the quality of our services you will receive future updates for your multime‐ dia system, the Mercedes me connect services and your vehicle's communication module. These will conveniently be sent to you via the mobile phone connection in your vehicle and, in many cases, installed automatically. You can monitor the status of your updates at any time on the Mercedes me portal and find information about potential innovations. Your advantages at a glance: R Conveniently receive software updates via the mobile phone network R Improves the quality and availability of Mercedes me connect services R Keeps your multimedia system and communi‐ cation module up-to-date MBUX multimedia system 289 Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.mercedes-benz.com Performing a software update Requirements: R For online updates: an Internet connection is established (/ page 358). R For automatic online updates: your vehicle has a permanently installed communication module. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Software Update 5 System Automatically Activate Automatic Online Update. The updates will be downloaded and installed automatically. The current status of the updates is dis‐ played. # Manually # Switch off Automatic Online Update. # Select an update from the list and start the update. Activating the software update Restart the system. The modifications from the software update will be active. # Function of important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. % If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto‐ matically (/ page 289). As soon as an update is available for download, a corresponding message appears on the media display. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install The update will be downloaded in the back‐ ground. R Information R Information about the pending system update is displayed. Later The update can be downloaded manually at a later time (/ page 289). Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com‐ pleted and the update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next igni‐ tion cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied. 290 MBUX multimedia system If all requirements are met, the update will be installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Please consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐ tion) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones R Individual user profiles % The guest profile is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings. A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. If you have set a PIN for your sys‐ tem, this will also be reset. Navigation Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press the z button. The map appears. The current vehicle posi‐ tion is shown. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid‐ ance is active. Showing/hiding the navigation menu © 5 Navigation If route guidance is not active the map appears. The navigation menu is shown. 4 The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active. # To show: tap on the touchscreen. or # Press the Touch Control or the touchpad. # To hide: the navigation menu is hidden auto‐ matically. MBUX multimedia system 291 Navigation overview Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des‐ tination entry options 2 To interrupt route guidance (if route guid‐ ance is active) 3 To repeat a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 To call up the ON THE WAY menu • To show Route Overview • To select Alternative Routes • Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) • To call up the TRAFFIC menu ♢ To show Traffic Announcements ♢ To show Area Alerts ♢ To show Live Traffic Subscription Info • To show Route List • To call up the POSITION menu ♢ Save Position ♢ To show Compass 5 Quick-access and settings • To show Traffic • To show Parking 292 MBUX multimedia system • To show Highway Information • Via Advanced options to use View, Announcements and Route % The options are not available in all countries. % You can enter 3 word addresses in the online search (/ page 297). This option is not available in all countries. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Destination entry You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Notes on destination entry Entering a POI or address & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Requirements: R For the online search: Mercedes me con‐ nect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me portal. R The vehicle has been activated for use of Mercedes me connect and you have accep‐ ted the terms and conditions for the service. Further information can be found at: http:// www.mercedes.me R The service is available. MBUX multimedia system 293 R The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. On-board search with the keypad Destination entry uses the on-board search of the database stored in the multimedia system. The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located is set 1. # Enter the POI or the address using the key‐ board (in the image) or using handwriting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? recognition 6 in input line 2. The entries can be made in any order. During destination entry, suggestions are offered in 3 by the multimedia system. Des‐ tination selection takes place in list 3 or with a 5. If the multimedia system is equipped with a small display, calling up list 3 is carried out using a list symbol at the top right. The following entries can be made, for exam‐ ple: R City, street, house number R Street, city 294 MBUX multimedia system ZIP code POI name R POI categories, e.g. Gas Station R City, POI name R Telephone number, if this is available for the POI R Contact name Alternatively, use voice input 8. To switch to handwriting recognition: select 6. Write the character on the touchpad. The let‐ ters can be written next to each other or above each other (/ page 275). To return to entry using the keyboard: select _. R # R # # # # or # # or Press the touchpad. To delete an entry: select 4. The characters are deleted individually. # # # # # # If characters have been entered in 2, select £ next to the input line. The complete entry is deleted. To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐ ters: select B. To switch to digits, special characters and symbols: select A. 123 changes to ABC. Display B changes to #+=. Select B and switch to additional special characters. To enter a space: select 7. To set the language: select 9. Select the language. % This function is useful for countries in which several character sets are supported. An example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and Latin characters. # To change the state: select indicator for federal state or province 1. # Select the state in 1. # # # # # Enter the country indicator, e.g. CA for Can‐ ada. The list is filtered. Select the country on list 3. The destination can be entered. To change the state or province: select the state or the province in list 3. To accept a destination: select the destina‐ tion in list 3. If the destination is ambiguous, select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Using online search % Requirements: there is an Internet connec‐ tion. Further information on Mercedes me: http://www.mercedes.me Online search is not available in all countries. Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina‐ tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. MBUX multimedia system 295 For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. % Enter a 3 word address (/ page 297). # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results, enter the destination in the input line. The entry order is not relevant, e.g. street and city. Use the functions described for the onboard search. The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed. Selecting previous destinations Requirements: R Previous destinations are stored. R For destination suggestions: you have cre‐ ated a profile (/ page 262). R The Allow Destination Suggestions option is switched on (/ page 267). R The multimedia system has already gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 PREV. DESTINATIONS The following entries can be selected in the pre‐ vious destinations: R Destination suggestions (/ page 314) R Destinations R Routes Select the destination or route The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. % You can save a previous destination or a des‐ tination suggestion as a favorite (/ page 314). Using the favorites, you have quick access to the destinations (/ page 298). # Selecting a POI Requirements: R R For use of personal POIs: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system. Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been saved in the "PersonalPOI" folder on the USB device. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 POIS 5 ª Where to? Searching using categories (no route guid‐ ance) # Select the category. or # Select All Categories. # Select the category and the sub-category (if available). The search takes place in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position. The search result are sorted by distance in ascending order. The POIs show the following information: R direction of the linear distance to the POI (arrow) R name of POI 296 MBUX multimedia system # # R linear distance to the POI To filter according to categories or in search results: enter a search entry in the ª Search text field. Select a POI from the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Searching using categories (route guidance active) # Select the category. or # Select All Categories. # Select the category and the sub-category (if available). # To filter according to categories or in search results: enter a search entry in the ª Search text field. # Select the search positions In the Vicinity, Near Destination or Along the Route. # If there are intermediate destinations for the route and Near Destination has been selec‐ ted, select the search position in the route overview. # Select a POI from the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Searching for personal POIs # Select Personal POIs. # Select a category. # If route guidance is active, select a search position In the Vicinity, Near Destination or Along the Route. # Select a personal POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. or # Enter a search entry into the search field and filter the list. # Select a personal POI. Editing personal POI categories Select a personal POI category from the list s. A menu opens. # To change a name: select Change Name. # # # # # # # Enter the name. Select a. To change a symbol: select Change Icon. Select a symbol. To delete a personal POI category: select Delete. Select Yes. Configuring categories for quick-access You can configure the categories for quickaccess. If you calculate the route, for example, the first three of these categories can be selected as symbols. # Select All Categories. # Select the category and the sub-category (if available). # Select f or ß. f adds the category. ß removes the category. # If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category to be replaced. MBUX multimedia system 297 Selecting a contact for destination entry Requirements: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ dia system (/ page 333). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 CONTACTS 5 ª Where to? Using the contact list Select a contact. The contact details are displayed. # Select the address. # Using search entry # Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐ ple, into the search field. # Select a. # Select the contact. # Select the address. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. % Route guidance to a contact address is relia‐ ble in the following cases: R the contact address is complete. R the contact data matches the map data in the digital map. Entering geo-coordinates Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 GEO-COORDINATES # Select Latitude or Longitude. # Select geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐ tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. To do this swipe up or down respectively. The map shows the position. # Confirm the entry with a. # To set the destination: select ¥ or ¦. # Calculate the route (/ page 299). Entering the destination as a 3 word address Requirements: R R Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is possible in the online search (/ page 292). The media display shows an Internet connec‐ tion with a double-arrow symbol in the status line. % Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? # Select the country indicator. # Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no search results, enter the destination address as a 3 word address. Separate each of the words with a full stop. The search results are displayed. # Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. 298 MBUX multimedia system % 3 word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system for multilin‐ gual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three meters. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do not have a building address such as street and house number, for example. The Empire State Building has this language dependent 3 word address: R English: parade.help.bleat R French: commun.verbe.bisquer R Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca 3 word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice for most routine appli‐ cations. You can convert addresses to 3 word addresses and back again: R at the website http://what3words.com R in the what3words apps Selecting a destination on the map Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Move the map (/ page 320). # Using the touchscreen: press and hold on the touchscreen. The destination address is shown. If several destinations are located at the selected position, a list shows the available roads and POIs. # Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. # Using the touchpad: when the crosshair marks the destination, press and hold on the control element. The destination address is shown. If several destinations are located around the crosshair, a list shows the available roads and POIs. # Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map If several destinations are located around the crosshair, the function is available. # Select Ä. # Select POIs in the Vicinity. The map appears. # Swipe left or right on the control element. The previous or next POI is highlighted on the map. The name or the address is shown. # Select the POI symbol. or # To filter the display according to the POI category: scroll on the control element. # Select the POI category. Selecting a destination from favorites Requirements: R Destinations are saved as favorites. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favorite (/ page 314). MBUX multimedia system 299 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 FAVORITES # Select a favorite. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. The following options are available in the favor‐ ites menu: R Saving addresses for home and work R Creating favorites R Deleting favorites # # # # # or If no address has been saved for home and work: select Home or Work. Confirm the prompt with Yes. Enter the favorite as a POI or address (/ page 292). To save a favorite: select Add Favorites. Enter the favorite as a POI or address (/ page 292). # # # # If all the positions in the favorites are full, first select a favorite which is to be overwrit‐ ten (/ page 268). Follow the instructions provided. To delete a favorite: select V for a desti‐ nation. Select Delete. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is shown. Select Delete. # or # # Selecting received destinations Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R A destination has been sent to the vehicle. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 REC. DESTINATIONS The vehicle can receive destinations from serv‐ ices or apps. Select a destination. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. % You can save a received destination in the favorites (/ page 314). You have fast access to the destinations via the favorites (/ page 298). Deleting a received destination To delete a destination: select V for a destination. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. # To delete all destinations: select Ä. # Select Delete All. # Select Yes. Route Calculating a route Requirements: R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. 300 MBUX multimedia system If there are already four intermediate destina‐ tions, the multimedia system asks whether intermediate destination 4 should be deleted. Confirm the prompt with Yes. or # 1 ¥ No route yet ¦ A route has been mapped # Select ¥. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins. or # # Select ¦. If a route is already mapped, a prompt is shown. Select Set as Way Point. The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins. Select Start New Route Guidance. The selected destination address is set as a new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destina‐ tion begins. Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des‐ tination shown % The POI symbols to the right of POIs in the Vicinity show the first three categories for quick-access. You can configure these cate‐ gories (/ page 295). # Select a POI symbol. The search results are displayed. # Select a POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. or # # # Select POIs in the Vicinity r. Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI (/ page 295). Select a POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Other menu functions To save the destination: select f. # Select an option. The following options are available: R Save in "Previous Destinations" R Save as Favorite R Save as "Home" R Save as "Work" # To call the destination: if a telephone num‐ ber is available, select Call. # To share the destination using NFC or QR code: select Share via NFC or QR Code. # Hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on the # MBUX multimedia system 301 mat or place the mobile phone on it (/ page 335). or # # # R Hold the mobile phone near to the multime‐ dia system and scan the QR code. To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www. To show on the map: select Show on Map. Selecting a route type Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Route # Select the route type. If no route has been created, the next route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. If a route has already been created, the route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. The following route types are available: R Fast R R A route with a quick journey time is calcula‐ ted. Short A route with a short driving distance is calcu‐ lated. Eco An economical route is calculated. The jour‐ ney time may be somewhat longer than for quicker routes. Trailer The option is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. A prompt is shown in the multimedia system. Confirm the prompt. The route is optimized for trailer operation with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Traffic information can be taken into account for the route types: # Select Dynamic Route Guidance r. # Select Automatic, On Request or Off. Explanation of the options: Automatic The route is calculated with the currently set route type. Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account (/ page 315). Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. R On Request A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐ ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐ fic reports. You can continue to use the cur‐ rent route or use the dynamic route instead (/ page 302). R Off No traffic reports are taken into account for the route. R Calculating alternative routes # Activate Suggest Alternative Route. The display button is activated. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # Select an alternative route (/ page 305). 302 MBUX multimedia system Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt Requirements: R On Request is switched on (/ page 301) in the DYNAMIC ROUTE GUIDANCE menu. R Route guidance is active. R There are traffic reports for the current route. If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new routes will be shown. The notification is shown in another application. Confirm the notification. # To accept the new route: select Accept Recommended Detour. # To maintain the current route: select Keep to Current Route. Selecting route options Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Z Avoiding areas Select Avoid Options. # Select Avoid Areas (/ page 323). # Avoiding or using highways, ferries, tunnels, motorail trains, unpaved roads # Select Avoid Options. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option. To avoid: the display button is activated. The route avoids highways, for example. To use: the display button is off. The route takes highways into consideration, for exam‐ ple. These route options are not available in every country. The selected route options cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the Avoid Ferries avoid option is enabled. A mes‐ sage then appears and you will hear a corre‐ sponding message. Avoiding or using toll roads Select Avoid Options. # Select Toll Roads. # Switch Avoid All on or off. To avoid: the display button is activated. The route avoids all toll roads. To use: the display button is off. The route takes into account all roads that require the payment of a usage fee (toll). or # To avoid a type of payment: select Avoid. The route avoids all toll roads with the selec‐ ted method of payment. # To use a type of payment: select Use. The route takes into account all toll roads with the selected method of payment. These route options are not available in every country. # MBUX multimedia system 303 Using carpool lanes When using carpool lanes, observe the applica‐ ble legal requirements as well as any conditions pertaining to when and where such lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only be used if certain conditions are met. Carpool lanes are not available in all countries. # Select Avoid Options. # Select Carpool Lanes. # Select For Two Occupants or For 3 Occupants or More ·. or # Select On Request ·. When this option is selected and a carpool lane is available, a prompt appears. You can continue to use the current route or select a route with the carpool lane. % If the Avoid option is selected, then no car‐ pool lanes will be used for the route. Selecting notifications for the route Requirements: R R R For an audible indication when approach‐ ing a personal POI: the USB device contains personal POIs. The USB device is connected with the multi‐ media system. The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Announcements # Switch No Driving Recomm. on or off. No navigation announcements are issued when the display button is switched on. # To select a navigation announcement: select an option # under the DRIVING RECOMMENDATION category. The following options are available: R Tone Only In place of the spoken navigation announcement you hear a gong. The gong signals an upcoming driving maneu‐ ver and also sounds during the driving maneuver. R Reduced Driving Recomm. If a navigation announcement is available, you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right". R Detailed Driving Recomm. If a navigation announcement is available and the Announce Street Names option is switched on, you hear a complete announcement, e.g. "In 600 ft (200 m) at the end of the street turn right into Sta‐ tion Road". # To have street names announced during a driving maneuver: switch on Announce Street Names. # Select Reduced Driving Recomm. or Detailed Driving Recomm.. The name of the street into which you should turn is announced. % The options in the DRIVING RECOMMENDATION category are not available in every country and in all languages. 304 MBUX multimedia system Selecting messages for TRAFFIC # Activate a message. The display button is activated. The following options are available: R Traffic Incidents Traffic incidents are announced, e.g. roadworks and road blocks. This function is not available in all coun‐ tries and languages. R Announce Traffic Warnings Warning messages are announced, e.g. before tailbacks that pose a risk (if availa‐ ble). This function is not available in all coun‐ tries and languages. Audible indication when approaching a per‐ sonal POI # Select the Personal POIs option in the ALERTS category. # Activate a category. The display button is activated. When approaching a personal POI in this category an audible indication will be issued. Showing destination information for the route Requirements: R A destination is entered. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ # Select Route Overview. When route guidance is active, the destina‐ tion and intermediate destinations are shown, if these have been entered and not yet been passed. The route can include up to four intermediate destinations. # Select a destination or an intermediate desti‐ nation. The following information is displayed: R Remaining driving distance R Time of arrival R R R R Remaining journey time Name, destination address Phone number (if available) Web address (if available) Planning routes Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Route Overview # Select Set Way Point. # Enter the intermediate destination as a POI or address, for example (/ page 292). # Select the intermediate destination. After selection of an intermediate destina‐ tion, the route overview is shown again. # Calculate the route with intermediate desti‐ nations(/ page 305) % If there are already four intermediate desti‐ nations, delete an intermediate destination (/ page 304). Editing a route with intermediate destina‐ tions Requirements: MBUX multimedia system 305 R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Route Overview # To change the sequence of destinations: select V for a destination. A menu opens. # Select Move. ø is highlighted. # Move the intermediate destination or the destination with 4 or s to the desired position. # Tap on ø. # To delete a destination: select V for an intermediate destination or destination. # Select Delete. The destination is deleted. Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐ nations Requirements: R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Route Overview # Select Start Route Guidance. or # If the route has been edited, select To Navigation G. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. The route is calculated. Route guidance begins. Displaying the route list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ # Select Route List. The route sections are displayed. The current vehicle position is marked on the map. The current vehicle position is shown with the following information: R The a symbol for the current vehicle position is displayed. R R # The name of the road on which you are currently driving is shown. The road number of the road on which you are currently driving is shown. The route list is updated during the journey. To show route sections: swipe up or down on the control element. The route section is shown on the map. Selecting an alternative route Requirements: R The Suggest Alternative Route option is switched on (/ page 301). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ # Select Alternative Routes. The routes are displayed in accordance with the setting made in the route settings. The routes are numbered. # Select the alternative route. # To show the route on the map: select Show on Map. 306 MBUX multimedia system # # # # Move the map (/ page 320). Set the map scale (/ page 319). To avoid or use route options: select Ä. Switch the route option, e.g. Highways, on or off. To avoid: the display button is activated. The alternative route avoids highways. To use: the display button is off. The alterna‐ tive route uses highways. Activating a commuter route Requirements: R You have created a profile (/ page 262). R The Allow Destination Suggestions option is switched on (/ page 267). R The Activate Commuter Route option is switched on. R The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐ cient data in order to show destination sug‐ gestions. R Routes have been learned for these destina‐ tion suggestions. % This commuter route is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Route # Activate Activate Commuter Route. The display button is activated. The naviga‐ tion system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. It automati‐ cally starts a route guidance without voice output. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐ dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. Switching the automatic gas station search on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Gas Station Search on or off. When the fuel reserve level is reached, and the display button is switched on, a message appears to start searching for gas stations. Starting an automatic gas station search Requirements: R The automatic gas station search is activated (/ page 306) . Driving situation The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. The following notification is shown in the media display Reserve Fuel Tap here to search for gas stations. # Confirm the notification. The automatic gas station search begins. The available gas stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed. # Select a gas station. The address of the gas station is displayed. # Calculate the route (/ page 299). The gas station is set as the destination or the next intermediate destination. MBUX multimedia system 307 # If there are already four intermediate des‐ tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The gas station is entered in the route over‐ view. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Starting the automatic service station search Requirements: R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest Rest Area function are activated (/ page 207). R There are service stations along the route section ahead. Driving situation The following notification is shown in the media display ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to search for rest areas. # Confirm the notification. The service station search starts. The availa‐ ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed. # Select a service station. The service station address is displayed. # # Calculate the route (/ page 299). The service station is set as the destination or the next intermediate destination. If there are already four intermediate des‐ tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The service station is entered in the route overview. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Showing a stored route on the map Requirements: R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐ ted with the multimedia system (/ page 369). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 SAVED ROUTES # Select a route. # Select Show on Map. # Move the map (/ page 320). Starting a saved route Requirements: R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐ ted with the multimedia system (/ page 369). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 SAVED ROUTES # Select a route. # Select Start Route Guid. from Beginning of Route or Start Route Guidance from Curr. Position. Route guidance starts. % The route can be saved with f in the menu (/ page 299). Recording a route Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime‐ dia system (/ page 369). 308 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 SAVED ROUTES # To start recording: select Start Recording a New Route. A red recording symbol is shown. The route is stored on the USB device. # To stop recording: select End Recording. Saving a recorded route Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime‐ dia system (/ page 369). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 SAVED ROUTES # Select a route. # Select f. # Select Save in "Previous Destinations". The route is stored in the "Previous destina‐ tions" memory and can be called up from there for route guidance. Editing a stored route Requirements: R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐ ted with the multimedia system (/ page 369). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 SAVED ROUTES # Select a route with V. # To enter a name: select Change Name. # Enter the name. # Select OK. or # When the name has been changed, press the G button. # Select Yes. # To delete a route: select Delete. # Select Yes. Route guidance Notes on route guidance & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. MBUX multimedia system 309 The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving instructions. Driving instructions are: R Navigation announcements R Route guidance displays R Lane recommendations If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically. Driving instructions may differ from the actual road and traffic conditions if: R The route is diverted R The direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐ tions. The route may differ from the ideal route due to the following: R Roadworks R Incomplete digital map data Notes on GPS reception The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things on GPS recep‐ tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in tunnels or in parking garages. Changing direction overview Changes of direction are shown in the following displays: R Detailed image of the intersection The display appears when you drive into an intersection. R 3D image The display appears when driving on inter‐ section-free, multi-lane roads, for example on freeway exits and freeway interchanges. Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction 1 Driving maneuver 2 Maneuver point, above this the current dis‐ tance to the change of direction 3 Current vehicle position There are three phases when changing direction: Preparation phase If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement is issued depend‐ R 310 MBUX multimedia system R R ing on the settings for driving recommenda‐ tions, e.g. "Prepare to turn right". Select navigation announcements for driving recommendations (/ page 303). The map appears in full-screen mode. The status line shows: the direction informa‐ tion or the name of the road which is to be turned into and the distance to the change of direction. Announcement phase The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction depending on the settings for driving recommendations, e.g. by announcing "In 600 ft (200 m) at the end of the street turn right into Station Road". The display is split into two parts. The map is displayed on the left; on the right, there is a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the immi‐ nent change of direction depending on the settings for driving recommendations, e.g. by announcing "Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. The change of direction takes place when the distance to maneuver point 2 is shown with 0 ft (0 m) and the symbol for vehicle position 3 has reached maneuver point 2. When the change of direction is complete, the map appears in full-screen mode. % Changes of direction are also shown in the Instrument Display. Lane recommendations overview This display appears for multi-lane roads. The multimedia system can show lane recom‐ mendations if the digital map contains the rele‐ vant data. 1 Lane not recommended (gray arrow) 2 Possible lane (white arrow) 3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back‐ ground) Explanation of the displayed lanes: Lane not recommended 1 In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without chang‐ ing lane. R Possible lane 2 In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. R Recommended lane 3 R MBUX multimedia system 311 In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also shown. % Lane recommendations can also be dis‐ played in the Instrument Display and in the Head-up Display. Using freeway information Requirements: R The Highway Information option is switched on (/ page 322). When driving on the freeway, upcoming freeway facilities 1 and available service facilities 2 are shown in the overview. These include park‐ ing lots, service stations and freeway exits, for example. # To open the display: select r. The entries are sorted according to increas‐ ing distance from the current vehicle posi‐ tion. # To close the display: tap on the map. or # To use freeway information: select an entry. # If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the list. The destination address and the map posi‐ tion are shown. # Calculate the route (/ page 299). or # Search for a POI in the vicinity. or # Use other functions, e.g. save the destination address of the service facility. Using quick-access for a destination informa‐ tion, alternative route and POIs Requirements: R The POI categories for quick-access are con‐ figured (/ page 295). # If route guidance is active, select the £ symbol with arrival time and distance to the destination on the map. The address of the destination or the next intermediate destination is shown. Using alternative routes # Select Alternative Route. The routes are displayed in accordance with the setting made in the route settings. The routes are numbered. # Select the alternative route. Setting a POI as an intermediate destination Select a category symbol, e.g. B for a parking lot. # 312 MBUX multimedia system # # # Select a POI from the list. The selection takes place on the route. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. To use POI categories for quick-access: select a search position In the Vicinity, Near Destination or Along the Route. Select a POI from the list. or # # Enter a search entry into the search field and filter the list. Select a POI from the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Saving the current vehicle position Select Save Position. The current vehicle position is saved to the "Previous destinations" memory. # Destination reached Once the destination is reached, you will see the Í checkered flag. Route guidance is finished. The navigation menu is shown. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐ tion flag with the number of your Î inter‐ mediate destination. Route guidance is contin‐ ued. Switching navigation announcements on/off To switch off: turn the volume control on the steering wheel or next to the touchpad during a navigation announcement (/ page 273). The Voice Guidance has been deactivated. message appears. or # Show the navigation menu (/ page 290). # Select !. The symbol changes to #. # To activate: select # . The current navigation announcement is played. The symbol changes to !. % This function can be added and called up from the favorites within the navigation cate‐ gory. # Switching navigation announcements on or off during a phone call # Press the © button on the steering wheel or on the touchpad. or # Tap on © in the media display. # Select Settings. # Select System. # Select Audio. # Select Navigation and Traffic Announcements. # Switch Voice Guidance During Call on or off. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated. # To leave the menu: select q. Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio 5 Navigation and Traffic Announcements # Select Voice Guidance Volume. MBUX multimedia system 313 # # Set the volume. To leave the menu: select q. Route guidance is active Turn the volume control on the steering wheel or next to the touchpad during a navi‐ gation announcement. # Switching audio fadeout on or off during nav‐ igation announcements # Press the © button on the steering wheel or on the touchpad. or # Tap on © in the media display. # Select Settings. # Select System. # Select Audio. # Switch Audio Fadeout on or off. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated. # To leave the menu: select q. Repeating navigation announcements Requirements: R R A route has already been created. Route guidance is active. Multimedia system: 4 Navigation (Navigation) # Select !. # Select #. The current navigation announcement is repeated. % This function can be added and called up from the favorites within the navigation cate‐ gory. Canceling route guidance Requirements: R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active. # # Show the navigation menu. Select ¤ in the navigation menu (/ page 291). Overview of route guidance to an off-road destination An off-road destination is within the digital map. The map contains no roads that lead to the des‐ tination. You can enter geo-coordinates or a 3 word address for off-road destinations on the map. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐ ble with navigation announcements and displays on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐ tem. Shortly before you reach the last known position on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the direction arrow" announcement, for example. The display shows a direction arrow and the lin‐ ear distance to the destination. Overview of route guidance from an off-road location to a destination In an off-road position, the current vehicle posi‐ tion is located within the digital map on roads that are not available. 314 MBUX multimedia system The following displays appear when route guid‐ ance begins: R A message appears that the road is not on the map. R A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐ tion to the POI. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Overview of off-road status during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐ ferences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis‐ plays are shown: R A message appears that the road is not on the map. R A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐ tion to the POI. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. R R Destination Saving the current vehicle position Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Position # Select Save Position. The current vehicle position is saved to the "Last destinations" memory. Using quick-access If route guidance is active, select the £ symbol with arrival time and distance to the destination on the map. The address of the destination or the next intermediate destination is shown. # Select Save Position. # Editing the previous destinations Requirements: To edit destination suggestions: the Allow Destination Suggestions option is activated (/ page 267). The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐ cient data in order to show destination sug‐ gestions. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 PREV. DESTINATIONS The following entries can be edited: R Destination suggestions R Destinations R Routes # # To no longer display a destination sugges‐ tion: select V for a destination sugges‐ tion. Select No Longer Suggest. Saving the last destination as a favorite % After saving, the destination can be called up via the favorites (/ page 268). # Select V for a destination. MBUX multimedia system 315 # # # # Select f Save as Favorite. To save as a favorite: select Save as Favorite . To save as "Home" address: select Save as "Home" . To save as "Work" address: select Save as "Work" . Deleting a previous destination To delete a destination: select V for a destination. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. # To delete all destinations: select Ä. # Select Delete All. # Select Yes. # Using external destinations and routes External destinations and routes can be received from the following sources, for example: R Mercedes-Benz Apps R R door-to-door navigation with the Companion app (USA) a call with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center via the me button (/ page 351) A prompt appears on the media display. Received destinations and routes are saved in the previous destinations. # A destination has been received: select Yes. # Calculate the route. # If route guidance is already active, select Set as Way Point or Start New Route Guidance. or # If a destination was received with photo information, select Start Route Guidance. # Calculate the route. or # If a destination has been received from an app, select Details. # Calculate the route. # A route has been received: select Yes. # Select Start Route Guid. from Beginning of Route or Start Route Guidance from Curr. Position. Route guidance starts from the selected position. Route guidance with current traffic reports Traffic information overview Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic Information and are used for route guidance. This service is unavailable in some countries. % There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐ tion: R Current traffic reports are received via the Internet connection. R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐ lar intervals. R Information from the service provider can be shown (/ page 316). 316 MBUX multimedia system Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐ dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐ fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi‐ tion, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Showing information from the service pro‐ vider for Live Traffic Information Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Traffic # Select Provider Information. The logo of the service provider for Live Traf‐ fic Information is shown. % Further information on Live Traffic Informa‐ tion can be called up on the home screen using Mercedes me & Apps (/ page 355). % You have the following options for extending the subscription: R at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R with a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐ tomer Assistance Center via the me but‐ ton Showing traffic information Requirements: R The Traffic display is switched on (/ page 317). R The following traffic displays are switched on (/ page 317): Traffic Incidents Free Flowing Traffic Delay Multimedia system: 4 © # Select Navigation. The map shows the following traffic information: R traffic incidents, for example: roadworks road blocks warning messages R R When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be shown in color on the route. Off the route they are gray. warning message symbols: Symbol Ô road safety notes, e.g. when approaching the end of a traffic jam If the vehicle approaches a danger area on the route, a warning message is dis‐ played on the map. In addition, an audible notification can follow a hazard warning. traffic flow information: MBUX multimedia system 317 traffic jam (red line) slow-moving traffic (orange line) heavy traffic (yellow line) free-flowing traffic (green line) display for traffic delays on the route lasting at least one minute - R Displaying traffic incidents Requirements: R The Traffic Incidents display is switched on (/ page 317). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Traffic # Select Traffic Announcements. If there are traffic reports, you will see a list. Traffic reports include accidents and other traffic events, for example. The list is sorted according to distance and shows the traffic reports received both on and off the route. A traffic report shows the following informa‐ tion: R Street number or street name Traffic incident symbol On the route: color Off the route: gray R Cause R Street symbol for a traffic incident on the route R Distance from current vehicle position Select a traffic report r. The detailed information is shown, for exam‐ ple the route section. R - # Showing traffic incidents in the vicinity of the map # Select a traffic incident symbol on the map. The details about the traffic incident are dis‐ played. # Select Ä. # Select Traffic Incidents in Vicinity. The map shows the traffic incident symbols in the vicinity. Traffic incident information is displayed in the status line: R Traffic incident symbol Cause of the traffic incident, e.g. con‐ struction work R Warning message (highlighted red) To select a traffic incident symbol: select q or r. To select a map section: tap on the touchscreen. R # # or # # # Press the Touch Control or the touchpad. Move the map. To return to the navigation map: tap on G. or # Press the G button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. Switching the traffic information display on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Activate Traffic. The display button is activated. 318 MBUX multimedia system Activating Incidents, Free Flow and Delay # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # In the TRAFFIC category, activate the Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traffic and Delay entries. The display buttons are activated. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn‐ ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Showing local area messages Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Traffic # Select Area Alerts. Local area messages are shown, for example fog or heavy rain. # Select a local area message. The details are displayed. Car-to-X-Communication Car-to-X-Communication overview The following requirements apply for using Carto-X-Communication: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi‐ cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R Car-to-X-Communication is activated. % Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. The communication module automatically estab‐ lishes an Internet connection once the ignition is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depend‐ ing on the mobile phone connection, the provi‐ sion takes place from within a second up to about a minute. Benefits of Car-to-X-Communication: R Hazards are recognized automatically in the background by the vehicle or may be repor‐ ted by the driver. These are then sent to vehi‐ cles with Car-to-X-Communication in the immediate vicinity. R If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's current position are received. This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehicle data to Daimler AG. The data is then immediately pseudony‐ mized by Daimler AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently. % Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseudonymization proc‐ ess. In this way, your identity is protected against access by unauthorized third parties. MBUX multimedia system 319 Displaying hazard warnings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation) If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options (/ page 317). The following displays are available: R Show all symbols. The Traffic and Traffic Incidents options are switched on. R Only show symbols on the expected route. The Traffic option is switched off, the Traffic Incidents option is switched on. R Show no symbols. The Traffic Incidents option is switched off. The following hazard warnings are shown on the map: R Broken-down vehicles R Accidents R R R R Hazardous weather General hazards Hazard warning lights, when switched on Crosswind warning % If the vehicle is approaching a hazard spot with a vehicle speed of at least 37 mph (60 km/h) the voice output "Traffic incident ahead" is issued. The voice output is not issued for hazardous weather. Sending hazard warnings Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle. # To send a hazard warning yourself: tap on the media display when the map is shown. The navigation menu is shown. # Select ¡. # Select Report Traffic Incident. A prompt is shown. # Select Yes. The Thank You for Supporting Accident Prevention message appears. Map and compass Setting the map scale Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Zooming in When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display or the touchpad. or # Move two fingers apart on the media display or on the touchpad. # Zooming out Tap with two fingers on the media display or the touchpad. or # Move two fingers together on the media dis‐ play or on the touchpad. % You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale (/ page 286). # 320 MBUX multimedia system Moving the map Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Touch the touchpad and move your finger in any direction. The map moves in the opposite direction under crosshair 1. When the map has been moved the following information appears in the status line, for exam‐ ple: R Distance 2 from the vehicle's current posi‐ tion is shown. R Information about the current map position is shown, e.g. the name of the road. # # # # On the touchscreen: move the finger in any direction when the map is shown. On the touchpad: call up the navigation menu by pressing. Swipe your finger up. Press the touchpad. Crosshair 1 appears. The map can be moved. The following functions are available: R Select a destination on the map (/ page 298). R Select a POI (/ page 295). R Show traffic incidents on the map (/ page 317). # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select 3. Rotating the map With two fingers, rotate counter-clockwise or clockwise on the media display or the touch‐ pad. # Selecting the map orientation Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Orientation. # Select an option. The # dot indicates the current setting. The following options are available: R 2D Heading Up option: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 2D North Up option: the 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R 3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. or MBUX multimedia system 321 # To use quick-access: repeatedly tap or press on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up. If the map is moved, it can switch between 3D and 2D North Up. Selecting POI symbols for the map display Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z POIs include restaurants and hotels, for exam‐ ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available everywhere. Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for example. % The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deactivated as a favorite. # To switch on/off using quick-access: if available, switch POI Symbols on or off. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map. or # # # # # To switch on/off in the menu: select Advanced. Select View. Select Map Elements. Select POI Symbols r. The POI SYMBOLS menu is shown. Switch Display POIs on or off. Selecting categories Select r in the POI SYMBOLS All Categories menu. # Switch Show All on or off. When the option is switched on, the POI sym‐ bols for all categories are shown on the map. or # Select the categories and sub-categories (if available) r. # Activate or deactivate the categories. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map. # Selecting personal POI categories # Select r in the POI SYMBOLS Personal POIs menu. # Select a category r. # Switch Show on Map on or off. When the display is switched on and the vehicle approaches a personal POI in this category, a visual and audible notification can be issued. # To set a notification when approaching: select a category or a personal POI V. # Switch Visual Notification and Acoustic Notification on or off. Switching display of categories for quickaccess on/off # Switch a category on or off in the POI SYMBOLS menu. Resetting the POI symbol display Select POI SYMBOLS Reset POIs in the menu. The settings are reset to the standard set‐ tings. # 322 MBUX multimedia system Selecting the display of text information in the map Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Text Information. # Select an option in the FOOTER category. The # dot indicates the current setting. The following options are available: R Current Street option The street you are currently on is shown in the bottom bar. When the map is moved, the street name, the POI name or the area name appears under the crosshair. R The Geo-coordinates option shows the fol‐ lowing information in the bottom bar: longitude and latitude elevation The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation. R None option The media display shows no text information in the bottom bar. Switching freeway information on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Using quick-access: switch Highway Information on or off. The display button is activated or off. or # Using the menu: select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Text Information. # Switch Highway Information on or off. When the display button is switched on, addi‐ tional information about the freeway facilities ahead appears during the freeway journey. These include parking lots, service stations and freeway exits, for example. Displaying the next intersecting street Requirements: R Route guidance is not active. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Text Information. # Activate Next Intersecting Street. The display button is activated. If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed at the upper edge of the display. Displaying the map version Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Version. The detail information is displayed. % The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data (/ page 324). MBUX multimedia system 323 A message is shown in the media display when a new map version is available. % Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Overview of avoiding an area for the route You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid. Highways or multi-lane highways, which are routed through an area to be avoided are taken into account for the route. Avoiding a new area for the route Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid Options 5 Avoid Areas # Select Avoid New Area. # To start in the map: select Using Map. # Move the map (/ page 320). # To start via destination search: select Via Address Entry. # # # # # Enter the address (/ page 292). Select the destination in the list or accept with a. The map appears. To show an area: tap or press on the control element. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided. To change the map scale: move two fingers apart or together on the media display or on the touchpad. The map is zoomed in or out. To set an area: select a. The Avoid area has been set. message appears. The area is entered into the list. Changing an area to be avoided Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid Options 5 Avoid Areas # Select an area in the list. # Select Edit. # # # # # # To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the control element. To change the size of the area: tap or press on the control element. Swipe up or down on the control element. Select a. The Avoid area has been set. message appears. The area is entered into the list. To take account of an area for the route: select an area from the list. Activate Avoid Area. The display button is activated. If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐ culated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance. The route can include an area that is to be avoided in the following cases: R the destination is located in an area that is to be avoided. R the route includes highways or multi-lane expressways which pass through an area to be avoided. 324 MBUX multimedia system R there is no sensible alternative route. Deleting an area Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid Options 5 Avoid Areas # To delete an area: select an area in the list. # Select Delete. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. # To delete all areas: if at least two areas to avoid are set, select Delete All. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. Map data update overview Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conven‐ tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have updates to the digital map imple‐ mented there. % Additional costs can be incurred in this con‐ nection. Online map update The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data. Requirements: R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated. % The online map update service is not availa‐ ble in all countries. The following options are available for the update: R For one region (automatic map update) R If the Automatic Online Update system set‐ ting is switched off (/ page 289), you receive a message that a map update is avail‐ able. You can confirm the message and download the map update. For several or all regions (manual map update) The map data will first be downloaded onto a storage medium and then updated on the multimedia system. Further information on online map updates is available here: R At an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Under: https://www.mercedes.me Further information on updates can be found at: https://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/ connectme/en_US/index.html. Overview of map data Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐ tory. Depending on the country, map data for your region is either pre-installed or the map data is supplied on a data storage medium. MBUX multimedia system 325 If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐ led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you do not need to enter the activation code. For map data that you have purchased in the form of a data storage medium, you must enter the accompanying activation code. % If you save the map data on a data storage medium with the online map update service, no entry is required. The activation code is stored on the data storage medium during the downloading process. Observe the following when entering the activa‐ tion code: R The activation code can be used for one vehi‐ cle R The activation code is not transferable R The activation code has six digits In the event of the following problems, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code R You have lost the activation code Displaying the compass Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ¡ 5 Position # Select Compass. The compass display shows the following information: R The current direction of travel with bear‐ ing (360° format) and compass direction R Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds R Height (rounded) R Number of satellites from which a signal can be received Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Orientation. Activate Auto Zoom. The display button is activated. The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road. % The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. # Displaying the satellite map Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch Satellite Map on or off. If the display button is activated, satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 mi (2 km). If the display button is deactivated, satellite maps are not displayed in map scales from 2 mi (2 km) to 20 mi (20 km). % The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries. 326 MBUX multimedia system Displaying the range Requirements: R The multimedia system supports the func‐ tion. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Activate Range. The display button is activated. The range is shown on the map with the follow‐ ing displays: R For gasoline and diesel vehicles: green dis‐ play When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map is switched off. % The range display on the map is not available in all countries. Displaying weather information and other map contents Requirements: R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENT category. The available services are displayed. The services are provided by Mercedes me con‐ nect. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym‐ bols. Further information about available services and about displaying information in the map scales can be found in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Showing map view in the multifunction dis‐ play of the instrument cluster Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Advanced # Select View. # Select Map Orientation. # Scroll up and show the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER VIEW category. # To set the map scale automatically: switch on Auto Zoom. The display button is activated. The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road. MBUX multimedia system 327 # To select map orientation: select an option. The # dot indicates the current selection. The following options are available: R 2D Heading Up option: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 2D North Up option: the 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R 3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. Parking service Notes on the parking service & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to not observing the maximum per‐ mitted access height If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permitted access height for parking garages and underground parking lots, the vehicle roof as well as other vehicle parts could be damaged. There could be a risk of injury to the vehicle occupants. # Before driving into a parking garage or underground parking lot observe the locally signposted access height. # If the vehicle height, including any addi‐ tional equipment, exceeds the maxi‐ mum permitted access height, do not drive into the parking garage or under‐ ground parking lot. This service is not available in all countries. Selecting parking options * NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and conditions. Requirements: R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me portal. R The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. R Parking is activated (/ page 328). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from cur‐ rent vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the parking garage/park‐ ing lot For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. 328 MBUX multimedia system The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐ cumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking machine) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number # Calculate the route (/ page 299). The following functions can also be selected (if available): R Search for POIs in the vicinity. R Save the destination. R Place a call at the destination. R Share the destination using NFC or QR code. R Call up the web address. R Show the destination on the map. Displaying parking options on the map Requirements: R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me portal. R The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Activate Parking. The display button is activated. The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehi‐ cle position are shown. Dashcam Notes on the dashcam * NOTE Before using the dashcam Before using any or all functions of the Dash‐ cam, please read this Disclaimer carefully. If you do not accept, agree to or understand this Disclaimer, please do not use the Dash‐ cam. By using the Dashcam, you are deemed to have accepted and agreed to the contents of this Disclaimer. As manufacturer of the vehicle, we provide you with the device and associated software system of the Dashcam to provide you with the functionalities that we consider you may wish to have while using the Dashcam. We are unable to predict or verify whether any image(s) or geographic information captured or recorded during your use of the Dashcam is legitimate. As such, we are unable to take responsibility for any adverse consequences that may arise from the actual image(s) or geographic information captured or recorded during use of the Dashcam. Warning: please comply with all applicable laws and regulations when you use the Dash‐ cam. For example, please do not capture or record image(s) or geographic information which may be considered as state secret sensitive information (e.g. military areas). In case of any violations of the relevant laws and regulations, the actual user will be liable MBUX multimedia system 329 for the corresponding responsibilities and we will not take responsibility for any misuse of the Dashcam. # Observe the country-specific regula‐ tions. The dashcam is available in the navigation sys‐ tem in combination with the augmented reality function. Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 369). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB device. Starting/stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R R A USB device is connected with the multime‐ dia system (/ page 369). The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select the USB device (/ page 329). # Select the Individual Recording or Loop Recording recording mode. If Individual Recording is selected and the memory is full the recording stops. An indi‐ vidual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten. If Loop Recording has been selected, several short video files are recorded. When the memory limit is reached, the oldest video file is deleted and recording is continued auto‐ matically. # To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording . A report may appear in the following cases: R For the Individual Recording recording mode: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped immi‐ nently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R If a video recording has started and a national border is detected, the National Border Crossed. Please observe the countryspecific regulations on video recording. mes‐ sage appears. This function is not available in all countries. R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Deleting a dashcam video recording Requirements: 330 MBUX multimedia system R A USB device with video recordings is con‐ nected with the multimedia system (/ page 369). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the p symbol. The RECORDINGS menu appears. # Select V for a video file. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. # To delete all video files: select Ä. # Select Delete All Entries. Configuring dashcam settings Requirements: R A USB device is connected with the multime‐ dia system (/ page 369). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam # Select Z. # To show messages after passing a national border: switch on National Borders Alert. The display button is activated. A message appears in the following situa‐ tions: R A video is being recorded. R The vehicle has passed a national border. % This function is not available in all countries. To start automatic video recording: select Automatic Video Recording. # Activate Automatic Video Recording. The display button is activated. When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically. % This function is not available in all countries. # Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. MBUX multimedia system 331 & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/load compartment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 99) R Stowing and securing the mobile phone (/ page 111) Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ 332 MBUX multimedia system Telephone menu overview 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal strength of the mobile phone network Options Device manager Messages Numerical pad Contact search Bluetooth® profile overview Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are auto‐ matically displayed in the multimedia sys‐ tem MBUX multimedia system 333 Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ dia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 333). R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode) (/ page 334). You can use all the functions of the multi‐ media system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and mes‐ sages with the mobile phone in the back‐ ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background any time (/ page 334). % Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio func‐ tionality can by used with any mobile phone (/ page 369). Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R there is insufficient network coverage in the area R you move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free R the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐ ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Connecting a mobile phone Requirements: R R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 283). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Searching for a mobile phone Select í. # Select Connect New Device. # Connecting a mobile phone (authorization using Secure Simple Pairing) # Select a mobile phone. # A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone. 334 MBUX multimedia system % For older mobile phone models, enter a one to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorization. % Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized on the multimedia system. Authorized mobile phones are reconnected automatically. % The connected mobile phone can also be used as Bluetooth® audio equipment (/ page 369). Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode) Requirements: R At least one mobile phone is already connec‐ ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select í. # Select Connect New Device. # Select the mobile phone. # Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs. # Select the tab with the desired mobile phone. The mobile phone in the selected tab is the mobile phone in the foreground. With the exception of telephone settings, the submenus in the telephone menu relate to the mobile phone in the foreground. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for both mobile phones. Changing the function of a mobile phone Requirements: R At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 333). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Activating a function # Select the í device manager. # Select a gray symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is activated. Deactivating a function Select the í device manager. # One function is active: select the color symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system. # Several functions are active: select a color symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is deactivated. # Replacing mobile phones Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select í. MBUX multimedia system 335 # # # No authorized mobile phone available: select Connect New Device. Select a mobile phone. Newly authorized mobile phone: confirm the number code on the mobile phone. Using in single telephone mode Select Device name. A newly authorized mobile phone is connec‐ ted in single telephone mode. If the mobile phone has already been author‐ ized and connected in single telephone mode, it is connected again in single tele‐ phone mode. If a mobile phone has already been author‐ ized and connected in two phone mode with another mobile phone, it will be connected in future in single telephone mode. # Using in two phone mode # Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. A newly authorized mobile phone is connec‐ ted with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone has already been author‐ ized and connected in single telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone was previously connec‐ ted with another mobile phone, this connec‐ tion is canceled. Disconnecting/de-authorizing a mobile phone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select í. # Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone. # To disconnect: select Disconnect. If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto‐ matically reconnected when the vehicle is next started. # To de-authorize: select Deauthorize. Information on Near Field Communication (NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. The following functions are available without having authorized a mobile phone: R Transferring a URL or a contact to be viewed in the multimedia system (see the manufac‐ turer's operating instructions). R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via the system settings (/ page 285). Further information can be obtained at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐ munication (NFC) Requirements: R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions) 336 MBUX multimedia system Follow the additional prompts on the media display to replace the mobile phone in one or two phone mode (/ page 334). # If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions). % If your mobile phone supports wireless charging, it will be automatically charged via NFC when it is connected or replaced. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone is on the mat (/ page 111). If you want to charge a mobile phone without connecting it to the multimedia system, lay it on the mat without beforehand unblocking the screen. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ # # # # To connect a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐ er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on it. Follow the additional prompts on the media display to connect the mobile phone. Con‐ nect the mobile phone in single telephone mode (/ page 333). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode (/ page 334). To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐ er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on it. Setting the reception and transmission vol‐ ume Requirements: R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 333). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 Z This function ensures optimal language quality. % Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume. # Select Volume. # Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception and Transmission. Further information on the recommended recep‐ tion and transmission volume: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Setting the ringtone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z # Select Ringtones. # Set the ringtone. 5 MBUX multimedia system 337 % If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the vehi‐ cle audio system. Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐ nition Requirements: R The mobile phone in the foreground is con‐ nected with the multimedia system (/ page 333). Starting mobile phone voice recognition # Press and hold the £ button on the multi‐ function steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition. Stopping mobile phone voice recognition Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐ function steering wheel. % If a mobile phone is connected via Smart‐ phone Integration, the voice recognition of this mobile phone is started or stopped. # Calls Using the telephone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Making a call by entering the numbers Select _. # Enter a number. # Select R. The call is made. # Accepting a call # Select R Accept. Rejecting a call Select k Reject. # Ending a call Select k. # Activating functions during a call The following functions are available during a call: k End Call m Microphone Off _ Numeric Keypad (show to send DTMF tones) W Add Call h Transfer to Phone (an active call in handsfree mode is transferred over to the tele‐ phone) # Select a function. Conducting calls with several participants Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 337). R Another call is being made. Switching between calls # Select the contact. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold. Activating a call on hold Select the contact of the call on hold. # 338 MBUX multimedia system Conducting a conference call # Select i Create Confer. Call. The new participant is included in the confer‐ ence call. Ending an active call Select k End Call. % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended. # Accepting/rejecting a waiting call Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 337). If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and mobile net‐ work operator you will hear a call-waiting sound. In addition, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone. # Select R Accept. The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended. # Select k Reject. % This function and behavior depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions). Contacts Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data storage medium. Depending on the data source, it is possible to save/load the following number of contacts: R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions: R Make a call, for example call a contact (/ page 340) R Navigation (/ page 297) R Compose messages (/ page 343) R Additional options (/ page 340) If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 333) and automatic calling up (/ page 338) is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls (/ page 267). These are shown at the top of the contact list. Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 Z # Select Contacts & Recent Calls. MBUX multimedia system 339 Automatically # If the Synchronize Contacts Automatically function is not active: activate the function by pressing once. Manually If the Synchronize Contacts Automatically function is active: deactivate the function by pressing once. # Select Synchronize Contacts. # You can see from the status of controller to the right of the Synchronize Contacts Automatically display text whether the function is active. Calling up contacts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g The following options can be used to search for contacts: R searching by initials R searching by name R searching by phone number # Overview of importing contacts # Contacts from various sources Enter characters into the search field. Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details: R phone numbers R navigation addresses R geo-coordinates R Internet address R e-mail addresses R voice tag (if set) R relation (if set) Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z # Select General. # Select Name Format. The following options are available: R Last Name, First Name R Last Name First Name R First Name Last Name # Select an option. Source Requirements ò USB device The USB device is connected with the USB port. ñ Bluetooth® con‐ nection If the sending of vCards via Bluetooth® is supported, vCards can be received on mobile phones or net‐ books, for example. Bluetooth® is activa‐ ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device (see the manufactur‐ er's operating instruc‐ tions). 340 MBUX multimedia system Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 General 5 Import Contacts # Select a mobile phone , from which the contacts should be imported. # Select an option. Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Select ó r in the line of the mobile phone contact. # Select Ä. # Select Save to Vehicle. # Select Yes. The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the q symbol. Calling a contact Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Select ª Search for Contacts. # # # Enter characters into the search field. Select the contact. Select the telephone number. The number is dialed. Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Select r in the line of the contact. # Select Ä. Depending on the stored data, the following options are available: R Add Voice Tag/Delete Voice Tag R Set Relationship/Delete Relationship R Send DTMF Tones (for a number with DTMF tones) The function is available when a call is active. # Select an option. Selecting options for suggestions in the con‐ tacts menu Requirements: R A profile has been created (/ page 262). R The Allow Contact Suggestions setting is switched on (/ page 267). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # Select V in the line of a suggested con‐ tact. The following options are available: R Save as Favorite The suggestions are saved as global favorites and do not appear on the home screen. R No Longer Suggest # Select an option. Deleting contacts Requirements: R The contacts are saved in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system 341 R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the vehicle. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone Deleting all contacts # Select Z. # Select General. # Select Delete Contacts. # Select an option. Deleting a contact Select g. # Select r in the line of the contact. # Select Ä. # Select Delete Contact. # Select Yes. # Saving a contact as a favorite Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 f Add Favorites # Select a contact. # # Select r in the line of the contact. Select the telephone number. The contact is stored as a favorite in the tele‐ phone menu overview. Deleting favorites in the telephone menu overview Multimedia system: 4 © # Select a favorite in the telephone menu over‐ view (/ page 341). # Press and hold the favorite. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. Deleting all favorites Tap on © in the media display. # Select Phone. # Select Z. # Select the connected telephone. # Select Contacts & Recent Calls. # # # Select Delete All Favorites. A pop-up window appears: Do you want to delete all favorites? Select Yes. Call list Overview of the call list Depending on whether your mobile phone sup‐ ports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is supported, the effects are as follows: R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐ played in the multimedia system. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile. 342 MBUX multimedia system If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is not supported, the effects are as follows: R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle. R The call list is not synchronized with the call lists in the mobile phone. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls (/ page 267). These are shown at the top of the call list. Making a call from the call list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # Select an entry. The call is made. Calling up additional options in the call list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # # For previously stored contacts: select r in the line of an entry. The search results are displayed. For contacts who have not been stored: select i. Selecting options for suggestions in the call list Requirements: R A profile has been created (/ page 262). R The Allow Contact Suggestions setting is switched on (/ page 267). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # Select V in the line of a suggested entry. The following options are available: R Save as Favorite R No Longer Suggest # Select an option. Deleting the call list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 Z # Select Contacts & Recent Calls. # Select Delete Recent Calls. # Select Yes. % This function is only available if your mobile does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® pro‐ file. Text messages Overview of message functions In the messages menu you can receive and send text messages. If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile, the message function can be used on the multimedia system. You can obtain further information about set‐ tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®capable mobile phones from an authorized MBUX multimedia system 343 Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Setting message displays Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 Z # Select Message Display. The following options are available: R All Messages R New and Unread Messages R Messages While Driving R Off (the message function is no longer available.) # Select a setting. Reading messages Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 l 5 Using the read-aloud function # Select a contact. # Select ¬ to read aloud. The message is read aloud. Dictating and sending a new message Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l # Select a new message using r. Adding a recipient # Select f. # Select a contact. Dictating text Select p. The dictating function is started. # Say the message. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text. # Sending a message Select Send. % When the vehicle is stationary you can use the keyboard to write a message. No Inter‐ net connection is required to use the key‐ board. # Replying to a message in the messaging his‐ tory Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l A message list is shown. # Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. 344 MBUX multimedia system # # # Select p. The dictating function is started. Say the message. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text. Select Send. Using message templates Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l Using a template as a new message # Select r to write a new message. # Add a recipient using f. # Select a 0 template. Answering a message with a template Select a message sequence with a contact. # Select a ª template. # Select a 0 template. # Forwarding a message Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l A message list is shown. # Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. # Press and hold on a message. # To forward a message: select Forward. Calling a message sender Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l A message list is shown. # Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. # Select Ä. # Select Call. Using telephone numbers or URLs from a text message Requirements: R An Internet connection is available to call up a URL. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l A message list is shown. # Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. # Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. If a URL is selected the web browser opens. If a telephone number is selected the follow‐ ing options are available: R Call R New Message # Select an option. MBUX multimedia system 345 Deleting a message Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 5 l # Select a contact. # Press and hold on a message. # To delete the message: select Delete. Mercedes-Benz link Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. With Mercedes-Benz Link you can use mobile phone functions via the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or the voiceoperated control system. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Mercedes-Benz Link via the voiceoperated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated via the Voice Control Sys‐ tem (/ page 230). The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐ tary equipment is required for this. This is availa‐ ble at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ ted via Mercedes-Benz Link to the multimedia system. When a mobile phone is connected with Mercedes-Benz Link, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system when in two phone mode. % The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses the Android operating system. % The service provider is responsible for these apps and the services and content connec‐ ted to it. Notes on Mercedes-Benz Link If a mobile phone is used with Mercedes-Benz Link, USB access using the media menu is possi‐ ble for this mobile phone. % Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multi‐ media system, it is closed when route guid‐ ance is started on the mobile phone. 346 MBUX multimedia system Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the multimedia system Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with the MercedesBenz Link control box. R The Mercedes-Benz Link app is installed on the mobile phone. R The mobile phone is switched on. R Mercedes-Benz Link is connected to the mul‐ timedia system via the ç USB port using a suitable cable (/ page 369). % The first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Mercedes-Benz Link 5 Start Mercedes-Benz Link Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ ulations For the initial start of the application: a message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start. Quitting Mercedes-Benz Link Press the ò button. % Mercedes-Benz Link starts automatically when it is connected with the system using a cable. If Mercedes-Benz Link was not dis‐ played in the foreground before disconnect‐ ing, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Mercedes-Benz Link using the main menu. You can find more information in the MercedesBenz Link control box operating instructions. # Calling up Mercedes-Benz Link sound set‐ tings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Mercedes-Benz Link 5 Z # Select sound settings. Ending Mercedes-Benz Link # Disconnect the connecting cable between Mercedes-Benz Link and the multimedia sys‐ tem. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. MBUX multimedia system 347 Apple CarPlay® Overview of Apple CarPlay® & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐ dia system using Apple CarPlay®. They are oper‐ ated using the touchscreen, touchpad, Touch Control or the Siri® voice-operated control sys‐ tem. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Apple CarPlay® via the voice-oper‐ ated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated via the Voice Control System (/ page 230). Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay® with the multimedia system. Also for use of Apple CarPlay® with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ cation and the services and content connected to it. Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Information on Apple CarPlay® When Apple CarPlay® is being used, the iPod® media source is not available for the respective iPhone®. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐ tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay® (cable) Requirements: R The current version of your device's operat‐ ing system is being used (see the manufac‐ turer's operating instructions). R There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Apple CarPlay®. R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia system via the USB port ç using a suita‐ ble cable (/ page 369). 348 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5 Start Apple CarPlay Alternative: If an Apple CarPlay® application is active (e.g. when music is being played or route guidance is active), you can call up the active application using the |, z or % application buttons (/ page 260). % Control using the application buttons can be switched on or off (/ page 348). # Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ ulations For the initial start of the application: a message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start. Exiting Apple CarPlay® # Press the ò button. % Apple CarPlay® starts automatically when the iPhone® is connected with the system using a cable. If Apple CarPlay® was not dis‐ played in the foreground before disconnect‐ ing, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® in the main menu. Calling up Apple CarPlay® sound settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5 Z # Select sound settings. Setting control of the application buttons (Apple CarPlay®) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5 Z 5 General # To switch on Control via Application Buttons: activate the display button. # To switch off Control via Application Buttons: deactivate the display button. Ending Apple CarPlay® # To end the connection of Apple Car‐ Play®(with cable): disconnect the connec‐ tion via the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Android Auto Android Auto overview & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. MBUX multimedia system 349 You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐ tem on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or the voice-operated control system. You can activate the voice-oper‐ ated control system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Android Auto via the voice-operated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated via the Voice Control System (/ page 230). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ ted via Android Auto with the multimedia sys‐ tem. Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Android Auto If a mobile phone is used with Android Auto, USB access using the media menu is not possi‐ ble for this mobile phone. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐ tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wired) Requirements: R The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0. R The Android Auto app is installed on the mobile phone. R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐ timedia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 333). R R If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto. The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ media system via the USB port ç using a suitable cable (/ page 369). There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Android Auto. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5 Start Android Auto # Alternative: If an Android Auto application is active (e.g. when music is being played or route guidance is active), you can call up the active application using the |, z or % application buttons (/ page 260). % Control using the application buttons can be switched on or off (/ page 350). % The first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea‐ sons. 350 MBUX multimedia system Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ ulations For the initial start of the application: a message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start. Exiting Android Auto Press the ò button. % Android Auto starts automatically when the mobile phone is connected with the system using a cable. If Android Auto was not dis‐ played in the foreground before disconnect‐ ing, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu. # Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5 Z # Select sound settings. Setting control of the application buttons (Android Auto) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5 Z 5 General # To switch on Control via Application Buttons: activate the display button. # To switch off Control via Application Buttons: deactivate the display button. Ending Android Auto # To end the connection of Android Auto (with cable): disconnect the connection via the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay® Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, cer‐ tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐ munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ media system is reset (/ page 290). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged MBUX multimedia system 351 R R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving Day/night mode of the instrument cluster Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction # # # To make a Mercedes me call: press me button 1. To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open. Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel). 1 me button for service, concierge or informa‐ tion calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over‐ head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 351). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Concierge Service (if the service is activated) R Accident and breakdown management (/ page 354) R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle 352 MBUX multimedia system You can find information on the following topics: Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from MercedesBenz R Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 352). Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ cally. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Further information on Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation are available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/ cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage‐ ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom‐ mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi‐ media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement the vehicle data is sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Center employee deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap‐ pears after a certain period of time. Transferred data during a Mercedes me call The data transferred during a Mercedes me call depends on which service is selected in the voice control system and whether Mercedes me connect services are activated. MBUX multimedia system 353 If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ ted and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted: R Vehicle identification number R Mercedes me customer identification num‐ ber R Reason for the initiation of the call R Language set in the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data may be transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data Transfer is possible assuming the required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile service operator and the quality of the mobile connection is sufficient. If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protec‐ tion query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location % At the time of going to press, this function is technically not yet available but can be sup‐ ported in the future. If the data protection prompt has been rejected the following data is transmitted: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt Mercedes me connect Notes on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ ices. Depending on whether the services are activated and on the vehicle equipment, you can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and breakdown management (me button) R If the service is activated: Concierge Service (me button) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐ matic emergency call or SOS button) Mercedes me connect accident and breakdown management, the Mercedes me connect Con‐ cierge Service (if service is activated) and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa‐ ble for you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 351). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 352). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always 354 MBUX multimedia system call the national emergency services first using the standard national emergency service phone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 356). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐ dent and breakdown management The accident and breakdown management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system (/ page 356) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐ wards the call to Mercedes me connect breakdown and accident management. For‐ warding the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a mechanic on location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐ cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐ nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐ nect call depends on the reason the call was ini‐ tiated, which service is selected in the voice control system and which Mercedes me connect services are activated. Which data is transferred for the services can be taken from the currently valid terms of use. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐ tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Mercedes me and apps Information about Mercedes me When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. Availability is country-dependent. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: http://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. Calling up the Mercedes me user account Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps Your vehicle is connected with a user account # Select Mercedes me. Information about the connected user account appears. MBUX multimedia system 355 Your vehicle is not yet connected with a user account # Select Mercedes me. # The instructions for creating a user account and connecting the vehicle with this follow on the media display. % If the Mercedes me app is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown. Calling up the Mercedes me services Requirements: R The vehicle is connected with the user account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps # Select Services. Within the various categories you can see the Mercedes me services you have already pur‐ chased and also those still available to pur‐ chase. To activate or deactivate the services, log in to your user account in the Mercedes me portal. Deleting a connection between a user account and the vehicle Requirements: R The (vehicle) profile of the user account that was first connected with the vehicle is selec‐ ted. R The profile is synchronized (/ page 263). R A PIN has been set. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Mercedes me # Select Delete Vehicle Assignment. # Enter the PIN of the connected user account. % Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐ work coverage from the wireless service provid‐ ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your MercedesBenz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission" section that follows (/ page 357). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐ ule. 356 MBUX multimedia system Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐ nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐ matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐ ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 356) or manually (/ page 357). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐ uation. Notification in the multimedia system dis‐ play: SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the MercedesBenz emergency call system (e.g. a malfunc‐ tion with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Triggering an automatic Mercedes‑Benz emergency call Requirements R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system trig‐ gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐ lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident. R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center. MBUX multimedia system 357 The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long . # To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands (/ page 238). The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call center. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center service provider. R On the basis of the call, the service provider decides whether it is necessary to call res‐ cue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select ~ on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress the button for several sec‐ onds. Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐ gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few (hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type 358 MBUX multimedia system R R R R R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically Time of the accident Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐ SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FORMERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be called up. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established Online and Internet functions Internet connection Information on connecting to the Internet & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐ ted degree whilst driving. MBUX multimedia system 359 Function of the communication module On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐ ule, the Internet connection is established via an integrated SIM card. To use Internet access via the communication module the following conditions must be met: R Mercedes me connect is active and ready for operation. R Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐ net access. R In some countries: data volume via Mercedes me connect is available. In some countries: if the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me con‐ nect services is limited. The data volume must be purchased via Mercedes me connect. % Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter to find out whether it is possible to pur‐ chase data volume in your country. Establishing an Internet connection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps # For example, select z Browser. % The multimedia system usually establishes the Internet connection automatically. If the multimedia system is not connected to the Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐ lished when an Internet application is used. % The availability of the function is dependent on the country. Connection status Connection status overview 1 Display of existing connection (double arrow) and reception field strength of the communi‐ cation module 360 MBUX multimedia system Displaying the connection status Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # Select Internet Status. % In the case of a connection via the communi‐ cation module the following status informa‐ tion is shown: R Type of network R Status online/offline Web browser Calling up a web page & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser Calling up a new web page # Select ä. # Entering a web address # Select ¬. % The function is country-dependent. % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Calling up a website from the browser his‐ tory # To call up the previous or next page from the history: select X or Y. MBUX multimedia system 361 Web browser overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 URL entry Bookmarks Web page, back Web page, forwards To refresh/stop Options Calling up web browser options Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z The following functions are available: R Bookmarks R Options with the settings: # # Browser Settings Delete Browser Data Select an option. Change the settings. 362 MBUX multimedia system Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Browser Settings The following functions are available: R Block Pop-ups R Activate Javascript R Allow Cookies # # To switch a function on: activate the dis‐ play button. To switch a function off: deactivate the dis‐ play button. Deleting Internet history Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Delete Browser Data The following options are available: R All R Cache R R R R # # Cookies History Entered URLs Form Data Select an option. Select Yes. # # Enter the name. Select a. Deleting a bookmark # Select r after a bookmark. # Select Delete. # Select Yes. Managing bookmarks Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser # Select ?. Closing the browser Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser # Select ©. Selecting a bookmark # Select an entry. TuneIn radio Creating a bookmark # Select Add Current Page to Bookmarks. The bookmark is created. Editing a bookmark Select r after a bookmark. # Select Edit. # Calling up TuneIn radio Requirements: R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account. R The TuneIn radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. R The data volume is available. MBUX multimedia system 363 R Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐ sion free of interference. % New data volumes can be purchased in the Mercedes me portal % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. 364 MBUX multimedia system Overview of TuneIn radio 1 Additional information on the current station 2 Display (if connected to private user 3 4 5 6 account) Data transfer rate Options Favorites To start/end 7 8 9 A To browse Search Selected category Internet Radio provider Selecting and connecting to a TuneIn radio station Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio # Select =. # Select a category. MBUX multimedia system 365 # Select a station. The connection is established automatically. or Select the search field. Enter a station name. % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn radio. # # Saving/deleting a TuneIn radio station as a favorite Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio # Select a station. # Select ß. The list of saved favorite stations appears. # Select Add to Favorites. or # Create an account for the online provider (TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐ media system. Your favorites are imported to the multimedia system. Deleting favorites # Select a station. # Select ß. # Select Delete Favorite. Setting the TuneIn radio options Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio 5 Z 5 TuneIn Radio The following options are available: R Select Stream: select the stream quality. R Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your TuneIn user account. R Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn user account. # Select an option. Showing the station list for the last category selected Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio # Press the cover of the current station. Depending on how the station was selected, a station list is shown. Media Information about media mode Information about supported formats and data storage media & WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐ dling data storage media If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary. 366 MBUX multimedia system The multimedia system supports the follow‐ ing formats and data media: Permissible file systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS Permissible data carriers USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio equipment Supported MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, audio formats ALAC % Observe the following notes: R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files. R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐ ported (32‑bit address space). R Due to the large variety of available music and video files regarding encod‐ ers, sampling rates and data transfer rates, playback cannot be guaranteed. R R R R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported. Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back. MP3 players must support Media Trans‐ fer Protocol (MTP). Information on copyright protection and trademarks Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐ tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐ bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. MBUX multimedia system 367 TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European Union and other countries. 368 MBUX multimedia system Overview of the media menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 Previous track or fast rewind Next track or fast forward Album cover Active media source Track and artist Current track number/track in playback list and active data storage medium 7 8 9 A B C D Repeat Settings Additional options Controls playback Timeline Categories Music search E Random playback MBUX multimedia system 369 Connecting the data storage medium to the multimedia system % When connecting several Apple® devices simultaneously, pay attention to the order in which the devices are connected. The multi‐ media system only connects with the device that is connected first. Additional Apple® devices that are connected at the same time are only supplied with power. Connecting USB devices * NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ tures High temperatures can damage USB devices. # Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle. Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device Requirements: R R The multimedia connection unit is found in the stowage compartment under the armrest and has two type C USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, additional USB ports can be found in the stowage compartment of the center console or rear folding compartment. # Connect the USB device to the USB port. % USB hubs cannot be connected with the multimedia system. R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. The audio equipment supports the Blue‐ tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. 370 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Starting media playback 5 Bluetooth 5 ª Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device # Select Connect New Device. Detected equipment is displayed in the device list. # Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connec‐ ted with the multimedia system. Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is established. Requirements: R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media # Select USB or Bluetooth as the media source. Controlling media playback Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media # To pause playback: select 8. # To continue playback: select 6. # To repeat a track: select :. For the repeat function there are the follow‐ ing settings: R Select once: the active playlist is repea‐ ted. Select twice: the current track is repea‐ ted. R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated. To play back tracks in random order: select 9. To wind a track forwards or backwards: tap on the desired point on the timeline. To select the next track: select ü. To select the previous track: select û. To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold û or ü. To show the current track list: select the track image shown. R # # # # # # MBUX multimedia system 371 Additional options for setting media play‐ back Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media Calling up additional options Select ß. The additional options are shown. # The following options are available: R Surprise Mix A playlist with randomly selected tracks is created. R Add to Favorite Songs The current track is added to the favorite songs. R Remove from Favorite Songs The current track is removed from the favor‐ ite songs. # Select an option. Media search R Notes about the search function in catego‐ ries Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several categories availa‐ ble for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format. Available categories with Bluetooth® audio: R Current Tracklist The folders and categories of the connected device are shown. R Available categories with audio files: R Current Tracklist R Playlists R Folder R Albums R Artists R Tracks R Favorite Songs R Often Played R Most Recently Added R R R R Music Genres Year Composers Select By Cover Podcasts (Apple® devices) Audiobooks (Apple® devices) % The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analyzed. Starting a search in categories Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 5 # Select a category. # Select ª and enter a search term. Sorting results shown or playing back all media found # Select Ä. 372 MBUX multimedia system To play back all results found in the cate‐ gory: select Play All. If, for example, the Albums category is active, all albums found by the desired artist will be played back. # To sort results alphabetically: select Sort from A-Z. # To sort results in reverse alphabetical order: select Sort from Z-A. % The available options depend on the selec‐ ted category and the connected device. # Using the keyword search Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input. # Select ª. A keyboard for character entry appears. # Enter the term searched for. % The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become. # Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search. Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Alternatively: press the | button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected. MBUX multimedia system 373 Radio overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Selects an active frequency band Station logo Station name or set frequency Artist, title, album and radio text HD Radio logo Options Switches the HD Radio function on or off 8 Mute function 9 Calls up the station list A Search 374 MBUX multimedia system Switching the HD Radio function on/off Setting the waveband Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio The following frequency bands are available: R SiriusXM R HD FM R HD AM Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select 4. The station list appears. # Select a station. 5 HD FM # Select a frequency band. Selecting a radio station Switch HD on or off. % HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see DTS website. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trade‐ marks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Cor‐ poration in the United States and/or other countries. # Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Swipe to the left or right on the control ele‐ ment. Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select è. # Enter a station name or frequency. # Select a station. Storing radio stations Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select a radio station. MBUX multimedia system 375 Memory slots are available in station presets # Select f. or # Press and hold on the radio station. Replacing a station # Press and hold a station. # Select Replace Radio Station. Replacing an entry in the station presets # Press and hold on an entry in the station pre‐ sets. # Select Yes. Showing accident reports Editing station presets Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio Moving stations # Press and hold a stored station. # Select Move. # Move the station to the new position. Deleting stations Press and hold a station. # Select Delete. # Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Z % The availability of the function is dependent on the country. # Switch Display Emergency Warnings on or off. Displaying radio text Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Z 5 General # Switch Radio Text Information on or off. Satellite radio Information on the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐ able for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Cen‐ ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. Satellite radio restrictions Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐ able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These include environmental or topographical conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz 376 MBUX multimedia system USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations may not be possible. Registering satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas‐ ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z Options # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ scription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service acti‐ vated online. To do so, please visit http:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Switching on satellite radio Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio # Select SiriusXM. MBUX multimedia system 377 Overview of the satellite radio 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Active frequency band Logo or album art (if available) Channel name Track information Traffic & Weather Now and Sports Flash Options Shows or hides playback controls 8 Stops playback controls 9 Station list A Search Selecting a satellite radio category Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM # # # Select . Select Category. Select a category. 378 MBUX multimedia system Selecting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM # # . Select Select a channel. Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM Storing the current channel Press and hold the logo of the current station until the Options menu appears. # Select Add to Presets. # Moving a channel # Press and hold a channel in the presets until the Options menu appears. # Select Move Highlighted Station. # Move the channel to a new position. Deleting a channel # Press and hold a channel in the presets until the Options menu appears. # Select Delete Highlighted Station. Displaying EPG information for the current channel Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Electr. Program Guide. Setting parental control for radio Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Parental Control. # Determine a four-digit character sequence and select ¡. All channels with adult content are locked. Unlocking a channel Enter the four-digit character sequence and select ¡. All channels with adult content are unlocked. # Music and sport alerts function This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. If a match is found with a stored alert, you will be informed. Setting music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Alerts 5 Z Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O. Setting a music alert Select Add Alert. # MBUX multimedia system 379 # Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Activating sports information Activate O Activate Sports Alerts. # Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog window. Deleting individual sports and music alerts Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries. All highlighted alerts are deleted. # Deleting all sports and music alerts Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries. All alerts are deleted. # Information about Smart Favorites and TuneStart From the station presets you can set up to eight stations as Smart Favorites. Smart Favorites sta‐ tions are automatically saved to temporary stor‐ age in the background. If you change to a Smart Favorites station, you can replay, pause or actively skip forward or back to broadcasts which you have missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change to another Smart Favorites sta‐ tion, the music track currently playing on the station is automatically restarted from the begin‐ ning of the track. Adding a channel to Smart Favorites Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM # Press and hold on the station logo until the Options menu appears. # To add a channel: select Add to Smart Favorites in the menu. # To remove a channel: select Delete from Smart Favorites in the menu. Creating a TuneMix list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z 5 TuneMix Lists In order to listen to seamless music, you can put together a TuneMix list from various stations. # Select Create TuneMix List. # If necessary, limit the number of stations shown using the Category entry. # Select the station shown O. # Press q to confirm. A TuneMix station logo is created in the radio menu. 380 MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating TuneStart Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Switch TuneStart on or off. Switching on satellite radio playback control Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM You can pause the playback of the current sta‐ tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline. This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐ porary storage. # To show the timeline: press 5. # To fast forward/rewind: tap anywhere on the timeline. # To pause playback: select Ë. # To return to live mode: navigate to the end of the timeline. Displaying satellite radio service information Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Service Information. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐ tings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound 5 Equalizer # Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Sound Tone settings Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound 5 Volume Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. # Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off. Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 100 W and is equipped with six speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Volume # Select a function. MBUX multimedia system 381 Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader 5 Sound Adjusting the balance # Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. Adjusting the fader # Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. Burmester® surround sound system Information about the Burmester® surround sound system The Burmester® surround sound system has a total output of 590 W and is equipped with 12 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Sound Focus R Sound Profiles R Volume # Select a function. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Equalizer # Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Activating/deactivating volume adjustment in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Volume Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. # Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off. Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Balance and Fader Adjusting the balance Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. # 382 MBUX multimedia system Adjusting the fader # Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. Selecting a sound profile in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Sound Profiles The following profiles are available: R Pure R Surround # Select a sound profile. Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Sound Focus # Select a position for the sound focus or All Seats. Advanced sound system Information about the Advanced sound sys‐ tem The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225 W and is equipped with ten speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Volume # Select a function. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐ tings in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound 5 Equalizer # Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Switching volume adjustment in the Advanced sound system on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound 5 Volume Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. # Switch Automatic Adjustment on or off. MBUX multimedia system 383 Setting the balance/fader in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound 5 Balance and Fader Adjusting the balance # Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. Adjusting the fader Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak‐ ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. # 384 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv‐ icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer (/ page 217). Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # # Always observe the prescribed service intervals. Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐ mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐ cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐ bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci‐ fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐ ate stops R mainly short-distance driving Maintenance and care 385 R R R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces when the engine is often left idling for long periods operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐ ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 384). Engine compartment Opening/closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the engine hood When opening or closing the engine hood, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine hood's range of movement. # Only open or close the engine hood when there are no persons in the engine hood's range of movement. & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. 386 Maintenance and care # # # Never touch the danger zone surround‐ ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewelry and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching component parts under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch component parts which are under voltage, you could receive an electric shock. # Never touch component parts of the ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐ tem when the ignition is switched on. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. # To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood. Maintenance and care 387 Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the onboard computer Requirements: R The engine has warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. # # # Push yellow handle 1 on the hood catch to the left as far as it will go (palm downwards). Lift the hood until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic strut. To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. # R Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis‐ play for indicating the oil level on the multi‐ function display is orange and is below "min": # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐ tion display is orange and is above "max": R # R # R Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On: Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: sensor faulty or not inserted. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail.: # Close the hood. # 388 Maintenance and care Refilling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐ nent parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi‐ cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. # * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Check the oil level again (/ page 387). Maintenance and care 389 Checking the coolant level # & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar 2. Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. # R & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. # Let the engine cool down before open‐ ing the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres‐ sure. Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐ tom quarter of the temperature display. Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to relieve overpressure. If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. Further information on coolant (/ page 464). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart‐ ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. 390 Maintenance and care # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Keeping the air-water duct free & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. # # Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. Maintenance and care 391 * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # # # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐ ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. R The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off. R R R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. In car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐ tral i is engaged. The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise the trunk lid could open unintentionally. % If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Information on using a power washer & WARNING Risk of accident when using high-pressure cleaning equipment with round-spray nozzles The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐ pension components that is not visible. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. # Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment with round-spray nozzles to clean your vehicle. # Damaged tires or suspension compo‐ nents must be replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing when using a power washer: R keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. 392 Maintenance and care R R R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140 °F (60 °C). observe the information on the correct dis‐ tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions. do not point the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits, electrical components, batteries, light bulbs and ventilation slots. Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Maintenance and care 393 Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care Observe the following information: Cleaning and care Paintwork R R R R R R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐ tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. Tar stains: use tar remover. Wax: use silicone remover. Avoiding paintwork damage R R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Remove dirt immediately, where possible. 394 Maintenance and care Matte finish Cleaning and care Avoiding paintwork damage Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R R R R R Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐ Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐ neering standards. Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treat‐ ment. Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. work care" (/ page 393). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Maintenance and care 395 Observe the following information: Cleaning R R R R R R Avoiding damage to the decorative foil For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. R R R The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature, e.g. hot air blower Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐ ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 396 Maintenance and care Notes on care of vehicle parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. Observe the following information: Wheels/rims Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. Windows Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often. Maintenance and care 397 Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Exterior lighting Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo. When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). Rear view camera and 360° Camera R R Tailpipes Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 199) . Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for MercedesBenz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. Do not use a power washer. Do not use acidic cleaning agents. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐ ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. 398 Maintenance and care Observe the following information: Cleaning and care Seat belts Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. Avoiding vehicle damage R R Display Plastic trim Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suit‐ able display care product (TFT/LCD). R R Real wood/trim ele‐ ments R R R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Headliner Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R R R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F (80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Switch off the display and let it cool down. Do not use any other agents. Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Maintenance and care 399 Cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Genuine leather seat covers R DINAMICA seat cov‐ ers Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use a microfiber cloth. Imitation leather seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfiber cloth. Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been rec‐ ommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. 400 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the safety vest compartments in the driver's and front passenger door stowage compartments. # To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2. Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored. # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations: R the reflective strips are damaged or dirty R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R the fluorescence has faded Breakdown assistance 401 Warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview Removing the warning triangle # # # # Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it. Remove warning triangle 2. Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the trunk in the left-hand stowage net. 402 Breakdown assistance Flat tire Notes on flat tires & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐ teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive on with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires). In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐ sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 402). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 403). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 351). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 447). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in emergency mode When driving in emergency mode, the han‐ dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cornering, when accelerating strongly and when braking. # Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐ mum speed for MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP® intervention R cracks in tire side walls Breakdown assistance 403 # # After driving in emergency mode have the rims checked by a qualified special‐ ist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run-flat tire), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐ ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐ ing system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk floor. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance pos‐ sible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐ ard tire as a temporary measure. 1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire inflation compressor Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐ sor (/ page 403). R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment) 404 Breakdown assistance You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐ tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant In the following situations in particular, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those previously mentioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure or on a flat tire. # # Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐ tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐ oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina‐ ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire. Breakdown assistance 405 # # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire. # # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐ sor. # Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla‐ tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ sor during this phase. # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). # # # # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the ignition. If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ lene. 406 Breakdown assistance If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being ach‐ ieved If the specified tire pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and han‐ dling characteristics. # Do not drive on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h). Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster in a location where it will be easily seen by the driver. * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Breakdown assistance 407 # # # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ tion compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐ tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or # Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ tle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being reached If the specified tire pressure is not reached after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐ aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the braking prop‐ erties and the handling characteristics. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ tery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐ evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐ tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. 408 Breakdown assistance You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # R R In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ist workshop immediately. Do not continue driving. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 161) Further information on ESP® (/ page 161) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐ aged in the event of an accident. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat‐ tery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # # # Do not inhale battery gases. Keep children away from the battery. Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified Breakdown assistance 409 specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐ ing the 12 V battery Keep children away. Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐ tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. * NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. 410 Breakdown assistance * NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐ gen gas igniting A battery generates hydrogen gas during the charging process. If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of the hydrogen gas igniting. # Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # When connecting and disconnecting the battery, you must observe the descri‐ bed order for the battery clamps. # # # When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat‐ tery terminals with identical polarity. During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con‐ necting and disconnecting the jumper cables. Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ tery clamps while the engine is running. & WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. # Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐ lation during the charging process and during starting assistance. # Do not lean over a battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg‐ ing, battery gas may be released. # Always thaw a frozen battery out first before charging it or performing start‐ ing assistance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐ cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance 411 All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐ ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐ nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R R R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐ tions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may be performed using only batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jumpstart the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position j. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off. R The hood is open. 412 Breakdown assistance # # # # # Example: engine compartment # # Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc‐ tion of the arrow. Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always # begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐ tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first. During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle. During the charging process: start the charging process. During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes. During starting assistance: before discon‐ necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐ trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete, perform the following steps: # # First, remove the jumper cable/charging cable from ground point 3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first. After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 407). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Breakdown assistance 413 Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require‐ ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐ ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐ ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐ ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐ nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. R Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐ nected in the same way. Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐ tems. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock is engaged. # Always switch on the ignition when tow‐ ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ ing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. 414 Breakdown assistance Permitted towing methods Vehicle equipment/towing method Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ sion Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) 4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) No No To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 413). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i or j. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐ play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 416). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐ tion. Breakdown assistance 415 * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn. # If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ tification plate (/ page 458). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j. # Install the towing eye (/ page 417). # Fasten the tow bar. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ tion of the tow bar # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 71). # # # # # Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 87). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 170). Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ ger available in the following situations: R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys‐ tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐ cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐ icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. 416 Breakdown assistance # # Use a tow bar. Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely, before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport # # # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 414). Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 411). # Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS The reduced damping forces on the vehicle being transported can cause the vehicle/ trailer combination to start to swing. As a result, when transporting vehicles with the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of your vehicle. # When transporting, ensure that: R The vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly R The vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps R The maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐ ing it incorrectly # # After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform. Breakdown assistance 417 # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. Towing eye storage location Installing the towing eye 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission Towing eye 1 is located in the stowage space under the trunk floor. # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi‐ cle. Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. # Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. % Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. # 418 Breakdown assistance * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐ cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐ ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐ mission due to tow starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐ tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐ ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 419). * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. Breakdown assistance 419 R R All electrical consumers are switched off. The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 419) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 420) R Fuse box in the center of the trunk (/ page 421) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 418). Opens & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. # Open the hood. # # # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 1. Press clamps 2 and lift the fuse box lid up and out. The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on the side of the fuse box. 420 Breakdown assistance Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐ rectly in the lid. # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps 2 engage. # Tighten screws 1. # Close the hood. Opening Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 418). # Lift carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow. # Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top. Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws 2. # Fold back the carpet. Breakdown assistance 421 Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 418). # Open the trunk floor (/ page 104). Fuse box 1 is located in the center underneath the trunk floor. 422 Wheels and tires Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐ teristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐ age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐ aged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tire tread Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that in heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐ lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire contact sur‐ face. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tire contact surface across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g. prior to a long journey or driving off-road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 424). R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. The valves must be protected against mois‐ ture and dirt by the valve caps approved especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Wheels and tires 423 This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never fit snow chains to the rear wheels. # Always fit snow chains to the front wheels in pairs. Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains Notes on snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐ nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect snow chain fitting * NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels before mounting snow chains. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are mounted, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are mounted. % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 163). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. 424 Wheels and tires Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient or excessive tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. # R R Comply with the recommended tire pressure and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel regu‐ larly: at least once a month when the load changes R before embarking on a longer journey if operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. R Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. R & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the han‐ dling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: Tire faults as a result of overheating. R Impaired handling characteristics. R Irregular wear. R Increased fuel consumption. R & WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐ sive tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by highway fill, pot holes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear Wheels and tires 425 R R Impaired driving comfort Susceptibility to damage & WARNING Risk of accident caused by repeated drop in tire pressure If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. # Inspect the tire for signs of foreign objects. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressures for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the follow‐ ing labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 431). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 425). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 437). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. Only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valve If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor‐ ing systems will cause the tire valve to remain open, depending on the design. This can also result in a loss of tire pressure. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. 426 Wheels and tires R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 437) Checking tire pressures manually # # The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressures for all tires approved for this vehi‐ cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. # # # Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 438). Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) # # Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. Read the tire pressure. If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐ mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐ mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Wheels and tires 427 Further related subjects: Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) R Tire pressure table (/ page 425) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) R Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare tire (if present), should be checked at least once a month when cold and then inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer (see the Tire and Loading Information plac‐ ard on the driver's side B‑pillar or the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table, you must find out the correct tire pressures for these tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure indicator lamp when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator lamp lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the correct pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also increases fuel consump‐ tion, reduces the life expectancy of the tire and may adversely affect the handling and braking characteristics of the vehicle. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres‐ sure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator lamp. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When the system detects a malfunction, the indica‐ tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐ ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐ sons, including the installation of incompati‐ ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction warning lamp after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels 428 Wheels and tires allow the TPMS to continue to function prop‐ erly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, are automatically taught-in during the first jour‐ ney they are used. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the multifunction display (/ page 428). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R Via display messages (/ page 508) R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 528) The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taughtin to the tire pressure monitoring system. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val‐ ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 429). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R There is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ sure monitoring system Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of the individual wheels: R R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. Wheels and tires 429 The tire pressures are already being moni‐ tored. Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐ mended tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing condition (/ page 425). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 424). % The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐ play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐ sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) # Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 424). Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown in the multi‐ function display. # To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐ rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Radio equipment approval numbers Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐ sure monitoring system Country Radio type approval number Canada IC: 4008C-TSSRE4A USA FCC ID: YGOTSSRE4A Further information on the declaration of con‐ formity for wireless vehicle components (/ page 25). Tire pressure loss warning system Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss. 430 Wheels and tires After a change in tire pressure, a wheel rotation or a tire change, or if you have re-installed wheels or tires, the tire pressure loss warning system has to be restarted (/ page 430). The tire pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pres‐ sure. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrectly set tire pressure R Sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire R Steady pressure loss in several tires The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐ eration R Driving with a high load Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) R Display messages about the tires (/ page 508) Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 424). Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart message is shown in the multifunc‐ tion display. Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. # # # To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display. Select Yes. To confirm restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Wheels and tires 431 After you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure of all the tires. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐ ard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐ ded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris‐ tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load-bearing capacity of the tires. # The load-bearing capacity must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. 432 Wheels and tires R Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 458). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐ sure table (/ page 425). # # # # Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 432) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424). Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐ suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # # (1): Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The weight may not safely exceed the availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐ ted in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐ mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐ mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐ cle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max‐ imum load (/ page 433) Wheels and tires 433 R R R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) Tire pressure table (/ page 425) Vehicle identification plate Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐ cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Step 2 434 Wheels and tires Example 1 Example 2 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Wheels and tires 435 Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 438) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 438) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the image is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐ ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ formance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (/ page 435) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (/ page 436) 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 437) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 437) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified test track of the US Department of Transportation. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 436 Wheels and tires and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ quate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include either accelera‐ tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. The traction classes, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern‐ ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform‐ ance. Temperature grade & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sures and regularly check the tire pres‐ # sure of all tires including the spare wheel. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐ formance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐ ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. Wheels and tires 437 R R R % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐ facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 443). Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). % The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐ ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐ fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐ er's side (/ page 431). Specifications for maximum tire pressure Information on the maximum tire load % The data shown in the image is example data. 438 Wheels and tires Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ fied for the tire. Information on tire characteristics Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Preceding letter Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the image is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires 439 Preceding letter 1: Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. R Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ cent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐ cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) R Maximum tire load (/ page 437) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) 440 Wheels and tires Index Speed rating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐ imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+S i" for winter tires All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐ facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐ ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐ cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Wheels and tires 441 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ tory. The tire and information table contains the rec‐ ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐ gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐ cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐ ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐ ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if 442 Wheels and tires these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐ chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐ er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐ tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐ tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐ nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Wheels and tires 443 Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect dimensions of wheels and tires If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐ sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con‐ trol systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐ tain AMG tires) Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. 444 Wheels and tires Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ ded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐ mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles. # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus‐ ing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use M+S tires . Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use M+S tire at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C (50 °F). Wheels and tires 445 Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Only install tires of the correct size onto the wheels. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All installed wheels must be equip‐ ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐ ter tires or all-season tire marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐ bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐ tions. R R R R R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing with tires that do not fea‐ ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) R R R R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 438) Tire pressure table (/ page 425) Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 452) Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ ent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tires have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris‐ tics. The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐ ponents may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐ sions. 446 Wheels and tires The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of the tire R Rear wheels wear more at the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 447). Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 in the trunk. Overview of the tire-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐ cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for instance, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt Tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack Wheels and tires 447 Setting up the folding chock R R # # # # # # # Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The required tire-change tool is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. # The vehicle is not on a slope. The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. Apply the electric parking brake manually. Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift into position j. Switch off the engine. Make sure that the engine cannot be started. Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐ nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Remove the hub caps if necessary (/ page 447). Raise the vehicle (/ page 448). Removing and installing hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 447). Vehicles with steel wheels The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Before unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel trim. # To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. Plastic hub cap To remove: turn the center cover of the hub cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # 448 Wheels and tires # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Aluminum hub cap # # # To install: position hub cap 1 and turn until it is completely flush with the wheel. Position socket 2 on hub cap 1. Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and tighten the hub cap clockwise. Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). R R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐ cally under the jack support point. Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 447). # To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap 1. % The socket can be found in the tire-change tool kit. # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Important notes on using the jack: Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ nance work under the vehicle. R Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid. R Wheels and tires 449 vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐ pletely. Position of jack support points Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri‐ ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ port points. # Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. 450 Wheels and tires Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 448). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐ nize dangers. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking. * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # # # # Position jack 2 at jack support point 1. Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maxi‐ mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 450). # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ pletely. # # # # Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐ pletely. Remove the wheel. Install the new wheel (/ page 450). Mounting a new wheel Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 450). Wheels and tires 451 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐ nize dangers. & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ ing. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the notes on the choice of tires (/ page 443). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 443). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screw‐ ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt. # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 451). Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 450). 452 Wheels and tires # # Place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible. To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet of the jack counter-clockwise. & WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐ rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor‐ que checked immediately. # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to the specified tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). # Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐ ted wheel and adjust accordingly. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn‐ ing system (/ page 430). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 429). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) # Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mount‐ ing an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteris‐ tics. To prevent hazardous situations: Wheels and tires 453 # # # # # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Never mount more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly. Do not switch off ESP®. >Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as neces‐ sary. The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐ gency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not install the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. % Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn‐ ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure loss warning sys‐ tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys‐ tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 424) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 431) R Tire pressure table (/ page 425) Removing the emergency spare wheel The deflated emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk. # Observe the information on mounting tires (/ page 443). # Open the trunk. # Detach the securing straps. # Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the securing straps from the brackets. # Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency spare wheel. # Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the emergency spare wheel. Inflating the emergency spare wheel * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. 454 Wheels and tires Requirements: R Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tire inflation compressor. R Remove the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well under the trunk floor (/ page 403). R Observe the notes on sockets (/ page 108). # Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni‐ tion lock. Press on and off switch 5 on the tire infla‐ tion compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on pressure gauge 6. Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch 5 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni‐ tion lock. If the tire pressure is higher than the speci‐ fied pressure, press pressure release valve button 7 until the correct tire pressure has been reached. Unscrew union nut 3 of filler hose 2 from the valve. # # # # # # Remove sticker 1 from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instru‐ ment cluster within the driver's field of vision. # # # R Pull filler hose 2 and plug 4 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Insert plug 8 of filler hose 2 in the socket on the tire inflation compressor and then turn it until plug 8 engages. Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer‐ gency spare wheel. Screw union nut 3 of filler hose 2 onto the valve. Make sure on and off switch 5 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0. Insert plug 4 in a socket in your vehicle. 12 V socket (/ page 108). # # # # Wheels and tires 455 # # # Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again. Stow filler hose 2 and plug 4 in the lower section of the compressor housing. Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle. 456 Technical data Notes on technical data Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐ tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐ rect operation of two-way radios If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, e.g.: R if the two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna R if the exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection This could jeopardies the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out‐ put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 457 On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. 1 2 3 4 Front roof area Rear roof area Rear fenders Trunk lid On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table. Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ sion output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz (100 W) 4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz (30 W) 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz (50 W) Trunked radio sys‐ tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz (10 W) 70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz (35 W) Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G) (10 W) 458 Technical data The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐ sion output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐ lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Permissible gross weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) Technical data 459 Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. VIN, engine number and other signs 1 2 3 4 5 ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 4 VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind‐ shield Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Permissible gross weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 3 Plate with information about emissions test‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health 1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped into the crossmember Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con‐ tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. 460 Technical data # Always keep children away from operat‐ ing fluids. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. Technical data 461 # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. R R Fuel Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with gaso‐ line engines Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 148). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON. * NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐ gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up as soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum design speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. 462 Technical data Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) Information on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Tank content and fuel reserve Capacity Model Total capacity All models 13.5 gal (51.0 l) Model Of which reserve All models 1.3 gal (5.0 liters) Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica‐ tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. Technical data 463 Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on engine oil and oil filters is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop Quality and capacity of engine oil MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Gasoline engine Engine oil specifica‐ tions CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71* * Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐ sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐ cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Capacity Model All models Capacity 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters) Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. You can obtain further information on brake fluid in the following places: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop 464 Technical data Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ ant Only add coolant that has been pre‐ mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1: At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop # # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F (-45 °C)) Coolant capacity * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐ peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐ tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz. Capacity Model All models Capacity 9.4 US qt (8.9 liters) Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). Technical data 465 & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐ age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐ ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ Fit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ ant Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ terFit with other windshield washer flu‐ ids. If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐ mate control system may be damaged. # Only use the refrigerant R‑134a # Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐ tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer fluid all year round. Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 459). * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐ pressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger‐ ant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be car‐ ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐ ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label on the climate control sys‐ tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil is located on the inside of the hood. 466 Technical data Refrigerant filling capacity Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Model Refrigerant All models 24.3 ± 0.4 oz (690 ± 10 g) Model All models 1 2 3 4 5 Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop PAG oil 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g) Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment Height when opened Model 1 Height when opened CLA 250 72.6 in (1844 mm) CLA 250 4MATIC Canada: 72.5 in (1841 mm) USA: 72.6 in (1844 mm) Technical data 467 Vehicle dimensions Weights and loads All models Vehicle length 184.6 in (4688 mm) Vehicle width including out‐ side mirrors 78.7 in (1999 mm) Wheelbase 107.4 in (2729 mm) Turning circle 36.42 ft (11.10 m) Vehicle height Model CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 57.0 in (1447 mm) Canada: 56.9 in (1444 mm) USA: 57.0 in (1447 mm) Please observe the following notes for the speci‐ fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. Roof load All models Maximum roof load 220.5 lb (100 kg) 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Introduction Notes on display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐ plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐ play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes‐ sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message You can select the desired symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. Press the Õ symbol to show further information on the multifunction display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the P button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐ den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐ play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. Calling up stored display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐ ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the P button. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Occupant safety Display messages 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Recognition of a restraint system malfunction: The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. R 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Recognition of a restraint system malfunction: The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey. R # 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 34). Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a per‐ son with an adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag are enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a person of small stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if a child restraint system is used while the front passenger front airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey Display messages Á Obtain a New Key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey needs to be replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 66). Replace Key Battery Á * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 132). Á * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. Key Not Detected (white display message) Key Not Detected (red dis‐ play message) # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 132). # 474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 132). * A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle. Don't Forget Your Key Lights Display messages b Check Left Low Beam (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is faulty. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the lamp are faulty. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475 Display messages b Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual b * The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative Active Headlamps Inoperative Switch On Headlamps 476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages b Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Switch Off Lights b * The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 116). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Intell. Light System Inoperative Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477 Vehicle Display messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐ Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance). * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Ù Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐ tinue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. û * The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering. # Switch off the ignition. # To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right. # Switch the ignition back on. C M * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. Never unlatch the engine hood while driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched. # # Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. 480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # N & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # ¥ Check Washer Fluid Close the hood. * The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Refill washer fluid (/ page 389). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481 Engine Display messages + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 389). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. # # Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired. 482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. ÿ * The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times. * You have pressed the start/stop button while driving. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 131). æ * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. æ * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Fuel Level Low Gas Cap Loose Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483 Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Change the transmission position. # Start the engine. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary * Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. 484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission position h or k. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐ mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Transmission Malfunction d Trans. Oil Overheated Drive on with Care Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears. # Let the transmission cool down. # If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speeds. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears. Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Parking Brake * The transmission is malfunctioning. The park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away * The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away. # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed. The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process. # Switch on the ignition. # Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i. 486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Operator's Manual * The transmission position cannot be reliably identified. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Teaching in Transmission Complete * The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again. Transmission Malfunction Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487 Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐ tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 157). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐ ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the battery charge level is too low: # Charge the battery. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: Switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake will be applied automatically. # If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157). If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 157). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 157). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 158). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491 Display messages F (USA only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition. ! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. 492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Do not add brake fluid. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493 Driving systems Display messages é Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative é * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 205). # If necessary, take a break. ä * The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 179). ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph 494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Active Steering Assist Inoperative Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision. Check the tire pressure if necessary. * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 179). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page 183). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Pressing a steering-wheel button R Operating Touch Control R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 212). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 209). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 209). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497 Display messages ç ð Ä ¸ Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 396). # Restart the engine. 498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages _ ð Ä à á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera % Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed using a built-in heater within approx‐ imately 12 minutes. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield if necessary. Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted ë Off * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 185). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499 Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 174). - - - mph ç * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put into passive mode (/ page 183). ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 174). Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 173). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. Suspended Off 500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 174). ¯ * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 171). Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 170). - - - mph Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501 Driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. 502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # # ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 164). Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes me connect Display messages Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Service limited. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Battery Display messages # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual # See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the battery: Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. * If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # * The battery is not being charged. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Switch off the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. The tire pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Display messages h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing h Check Tires Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐ ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 424) and the tires. 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages h Please Correct Tire Pressure h Warning Tire Malfunction Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 429). * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways: R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Do not drive with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires. # Notes on flat tires (/ page 402). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. # Drive more slowly. Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Tire pressure loss warning system Display messages Check Tire Pressure Soon Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure. 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 424) and the tires. When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 429). Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 429). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513 Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # 5 Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 388). Notes on engine oil (/ page 462). * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level # # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. 514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # # # # 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Switch off the engine. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 388). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 462). * Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # 5 Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Instrument Display (standard) Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star‐ ted or during a journey. Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display may differ from the example shown. 516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Indicator and warning lamps: Low beam (/ page 113) L Parking lamps (/ page 113) T High beam (/ page 114) K #! Turn signal light (/ page 114) Rear fog light (/ page 113) R Restraint system (/ page 517) 6 Seat belt not fastened (/ page 517) ü USA: brakes (red) (/ page 522) $ Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 522) J Electric parking brake (yellow) ! (/ page 522) USA: electric parking brake applied F (red) (/ page 522) Canada: electric parking brake ! applied (red) (/ page 522) ABS malfunction (/ page 525) ! ÷ ESP® (/ page 525) å ESP® OFF (/ page 525) L Distance warning (/ page 524) Ù ; # æ ÿ h Electric power steering malfunction (/ page 518) Check Engine (/ page 519) Electrical malfunction (/ page 519) Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐ tion indicator (/ page 519) Vehicles with a Widescreen Cock‐ pit: coolant too hot or cold (/ page 519) Tire pressure monitor (/ page 528) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517 Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the multifunction display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. * The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt(/ page 38). * There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. 518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. *The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 38). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Warning lamp for electric power steering Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the multifunction display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519 Engine Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Coolant warning lamp The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R Coolant level too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty ÿ If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Note the messages on the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: 520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or # # # # ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp # Electrical malfunction warn‐ ing lamp Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. Check the coolant level (/ page 389). Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. * There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions æ The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. æ The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. *There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐ ing. # Close the fuel filler cap. Fuel reserve warning lamp Fuel reserve warning lamp If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # 522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (USA only) ! Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (Can‐ ada only) ! Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is mal‐ functioning Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking brake malfunctions. * # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Brake warning lamp (USA) The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. $ J Brakes warning lamp (Can‐ ada) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circum‐ stances. 524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Note the messages on the multifunction display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp L Warning lamp for distance warning function Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. * The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 164). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525 Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ABS warning lamp The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. ! & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the multifunction display. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. * One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 161). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the multifunction display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527 Warning/indicator lamp å ESP® OFF warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP® is deactivated. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety sys‐ tems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires. If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 161). 528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. *The tire pressure monitoring system is defective. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. *The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. 530 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC ..................................................... Function ............................................... 12 V battery see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket see Socket (115 V) 360° Camera ........................................... Care .................................................... Function .............................................. Opening the camera cover (rear view camera) ............................................... Selecting a view ................................... 147 147 196 396 196 199 199 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ 127 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 126 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .............. 161 Acceleration see Kickdown Accident and breakdown manage‐ ment Mercedes me connect ......................... 354 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating ......................... 65 Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Burmester® surround sound system .... 381 Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 209 Activating/deactivating ....................... 212 Brake application ................................. 211 Function .............................................. 209 System limitations ............................... 209 Active Brake Assist Function/notes ................................... 164 Setting ................................................. 170 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 173 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 183 Active Lane Change Assist ................... 181 Calling up a speed ............................... 174 Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 183 Function ............................................... 173 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. Requirements ....................................... Route-based speed adaptation ............ Steering wheel buttons ........................ Storing a speed .................................... Switching off/deactivating .................. Switching on/activating ....................... System limitations ............................... Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... Active Lane Change Assist ...................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Function ............................................... Active Lane Keeping Assist ..................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Activating/deactivating the warning .... Function ............................................... Setting the sensitivity .......................... System limits ....................................... Active Parking Assist .............................. Cross Traffic Alert ............................... Drive Away Assist ................................ Exiting a parking space ....................... Function .............................................. Maneuvering assistance ...................... 174 174 178 174 174 174 174 173 183 181 183 181 212 214 214 212 214 212 199 204 204 202 199 205 Index 531 Parking ................................................ System limitations ............................... Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... Display ................................................. Function .............................................. Active Steering Assist ............................. Activating/deactivating ....................... Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. Active Lane Change Assist ................... Displays in the Instrument Display ...... Function .............................................. System limitations ............................... Adaptive brake lights .............................. Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function ............................................... Switching on/off .................................. Additives .................................................. Engine oil ............................................ Fuel ..................................................... 201 199 177 177 177 179 181 183 181 183 179 179 170 116 117 462 462 462 Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuel Address book see Contacts Adjusting the balance/fader Advanced sound system ...................... Burmester® surround sound system .... Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Burmester® surround sound system .... Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass Burmester® surround sound system .... Adjusting the sound focus Burmester® surround sound system ... Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Advanced sound system ...................... Burmester® surround sound system .... Advanced sound system Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 383 381 381 381 382 382 381 383 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 382 Calling up the sound menu .................. 382 Information .......................................... 382 Switching volume adjustment on/off ............................................................. 382 After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS Air bag Reduced protection ............................... 42 Air conditioning menu Calling up ............................................ 127 Air distribution Setting (multimedia system) ................ 127 Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure see Tire pressure Air vents ................................................... 129 Adjusting (front) .................................. 129 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 129 Air vents see Air vents 532 Index Air-recirculation mode ............................ 128 Air-water duct .......................................... 390 Keeping free ........................................ 390 Airbag ......................................................... 40 Activation .............................................. 34 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 40 Installation locations ............................. 40 Knee airbag ........................................... 40 Overview ............................................... 40 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 45 Protection .............................................. 41 Side airbag ............................................ 40 Window curtain airbag ........................... 40 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Alternative route see Route Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system) ................ 118 Android Auto ............................................ 348 Connecting a mobile phone ................. 349 Control using the application buttons ............................................................. 350 Ending ................................................. 350 Information .......................................... 349 Overview ............................................. 348 Sound settings .................................... 350 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 350 Animals Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anti-theft protection Immobilizer ............................................ 85 Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay® ........................................ 347 Connecting an iPhone® ....................... 347 Control using the application buttons ............................................................. 348 Ending ................................................. 348 Notes ................................................... 347 Overview ............................................. 347 Sound settings .................................... 348 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 350 Assistance Menu (on-board computer) .................. 221 Assistance systems see Driving safety system ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 384 Battery disconnection periods ............. 385 Displaying the service due date ........... 384 Function/notes ................................... 384 Regular maintenance work .................. 384 Special service requirements .............. 384 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 85 Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor ....................................... 88 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm ..................................................... 87 Index 533 Deactivating the alarm .......................... 86 Function ................................................ 85 Function of the interior motion sensor .. 87 The tow-away alarm function ................. 87 ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 205, 207 Function .............................................. 205 Setting ................................................. 207 System limitations ............................... 205 Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights .......................... 114 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 137 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 137 Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff .......................................... 43, 45 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 45 Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating ....................... 125 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 142 Drive program display .......................... 140 Drive programs .................................... 139 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 139 Engaging drive position ....................... 144 Engaging neutral .................................. 143 Engaging park position ........................ 143 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 143 Kickdown ............................................. 145 Manual gearshifting ............................. 144 Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ 144 Transmission position display .............. 142 Transmission positions ........................ 142 Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem) B BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................... 161 Battery Charging (Remote Online) .................... 133 SmartKey ............................................... 66 Battery see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 412 Charging ............................................... 411 Charging (Remote Online) .................... 133 Notes ................................................... 407 Notes (starting assistance and charging) ............................................. 409 Replacing ............................................. 412 Starting assistance .............................. 411 Belt see Seat belt Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 209 Activating/deactivating ....................... 212 Function .............................................. 209 System limitations ............................... 209 534 Index Bluetooth® ............................................... Activating/deactivating ....................... Information .......................................... Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes .................................................. Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... Active Brake Assist .............................. Adaptive brake lights ........................... BAS (Brake Assist System) ................... Driving tips .......................................... EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... HOLD function ..................................... Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. New/replaced brakepads/brake discs .................................................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 283 283 283 463 164 161 164 170 161 134 164 185 134 134 134 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Changing a wheel ................................ 447 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Roadside Assistance ............................. 23 Tow-starting ......................................... 418 Towing away ......................................... 414 Transporting the vehicle ....................... 416 Breakdown see Flat tire Burmester® surround sound system ..... 381 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 381 Adjusting the sound focus ................... 382 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ................................................ 381 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 381 Calls up the sound menu ..................... 381 Information .......................................... 381 Selecting the sound profile .................. 382 Buttons Steering wheel ..................................... 216 C Call list Deleting ............................................... Making a call ....................................... Overview .............................................. Selecting options ................................ Selecting options for suggestions ........ Calling up the sound menu Advanced sound system ...................... Calls .......................................................... Accepting ............................................ Activating functions during a call ......... Calls with several participants ............. Declining ............................................. Ending a call ........................................ Incoming call during an existing call .... Making ................................................ Mercedes me ....................................... Calls up the sound menu Burmester® surround sound system .... Camera see 360° Camera see Rear view camera 342 342 341 342 342 382 337 337 337 337 337 337 338 337 351 381 Index 535 Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Car wash (care) ....................................... Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings .................. Overview .............................................. Sending hazard warnings ..................... Care .......................................................... Air-water duct ...................................... Automatic car wash ............................. Carpet ................................................. Decorative foil ..................................... Display ................................................ Exterior lighting ................................... Headliner ............................................. Matte finish ......................................... Paintwork ............................................ Plastic trim .......................................... Power washer ...................................... Real wood/trim elements .................... Rear view camera ................................ Rear view camera/360° Camera ........ 390 319 318 319 397 390 390 397 394 397 396 397 393 393 397 391 397 396 396 Seat belts ............................................ 397 Seat cover ........................................... 397 Sensors ............................................... 396 Tailpipes .............................................. 396 Washing by hand ................................. 392 Wheels/rims ....................................... 396 Windows .............................................. 396 Wiper blades ....................................... 396 Cargo tie-down rings ............................... 104 Carpet (Care) ............................................ 397 Change of address .................................... 23 Change of ownership ................................ 23 Changing a wheel Preparation .......................................... 447 Raising the vehicle .............................. 448 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing gears ........................................ 144 Manually .............................................. 144 Changing hub caps .................................. 447 Character entry On the touchpad .................................. 275 Charging Battery (vehicle) ................................... 411 USB port .............................................. 109 Child safety lock Rear door ............................................... 61 Rear side windows ................................. 62 Child seat Attaching (notes) ................................... 53 Basic instructions .................................. 48 Front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 59 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 54 Notes on risks and dangers ................... 49 Securing on the front passenger seat .... 60 Securing on the rear seat ...................... 58 Top Tether .............................................. 56 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ............. 49 Basic instructions .................................. 48 Special seat belt retractor ..................... 54 Chock ....................................................... 446 Storage location .................................. 446 Chock see Chock 536 Index Cleaning see Care Climate control Activating/deactivating ....................... Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ....................... Activating/deactivating the A/C function (multimedia system) .............. Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (control panel) .......... Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (multimedia sys‐ tem) ..................................................... Air distribution settings ....................... Air-recirculation mode ......................... Automatic control ................................ Calling up the air conditioning menu ... Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control .................................... Filling capacity for PAG oil ................... Front air vents ..................................... Note .................................................... Rear air vents ...................................... Refrigerant .......................................... Refrigerant filling capacity ................... 126 126 127 128 128 127 128 127 127 126 466 129 126 129 465 466 Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. 128 Residual heat ....................................... 128 Setting (multimedia system) ................ 127 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 78 Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST Combination switch ................................. 114 Compass .................................................. 325 Computer see On-board computer Connection status Displaying ............................................ 360 Overview ............................................. 359 Contacts ................................................... 338 Calling up ............................................ 339 Deleting ............................................... 340 Deleting favorites ................................. 341 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 338 Importing ............................................ 340 Importing (overview) ........................... 339 Information .......................................... 338 Making a call ....................................... 340 Name format ....................................... 339 Options ................................................ 340 Saving as a favorite .............................. 341 Selecting options for suggestions ........ 340 Storing ................................................ 340 Convenience closing feature .................... 79 Convenience opening ................................ 78 Coolant (engine) Capacity .............................................. 464 Check level .......................................... 389 Notes ................................................... 464 Copyrights License .................................................. 31 Trademarks ............................................ 32 Cornering light function .......................... 116 Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 204 Crosswind Assist Function/notes ................................... 164 Cruise control .......................................... 170 Buttons ................................................ 171 Index 537 Calling up a speed ............................... 171 Function .............................................. 170 Requirements: ..................................... 171 Selecting .............................................. 171 Setting a speed .................................... 171 Storing a speed .................................... 171 Switching off ........................................ 171 Switching on ........................................ 171 System limitations ............................... 170 Cup holder ............................................... 106 Installing/removing (center console) ... 106 Rear passenger compartment ............. 107 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ......... 27 Customer Relations Department ............. 27 D Damage detection (parked vehicle) ....... 158 Damping adjustment ............................... 187 Dashboard see Cockpit Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Dashcam Configuring the settings ...................... 330 Deleting a video recording ................... 329 Notes .................................................. 328 Selecting a USB device ....................... 329 Starting/stopping video recording ...... 329 Data acquisition Vehicle .................................................. 28 Data import/export ................................ 286 Function/notes ................................... 286 Importing/exporting ............................ 287 Data storage Electronic control units ......................... 28 Online services ...................................... 30 Vehicle .................................................. 28 Date Setting the time and date automati‐ cally ..................................................... 282 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 86 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components ................ 25 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) .. Definitions (tires and loading) ............... Designs Menu (on-board computer) .................. Destination ............................................... Editing intermediate destinations ........ Editing the previous destinations ......... External ............................................... Quick-access to destination informa‐ tion ...................................................... Saving (current vehicle position) .......... Saving as global favorite ...................... Destination entry .................................... Entering 3 word addresses .................. Entering a POI or address .................... Entering an intermediate destination .. Entering geo-coordinates ..................... Notes .................................................. Selecting a contact .............................. Selecting a POI .................................... Selecting a received destination ......... Selecting from favorites ...................... Selecting from the map ....................... Selecting previous destinations ........... 394 440 218 314 304 314 315 311 314 314 292 297 292 304 297 292 297 295 299 298 298 295 538 Index Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 26 Digital Operator's Manual ........................ 20 Digital speedometer ............................... 222 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 142 Engaging drive position ....................... 144 Engaging neutral .................................. 143 Engaging park position ........................ 143 Engaging park position automatically .. 143 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 143 Function .............................................. 142 Display (Care) .......................................... 397 Display (multimedia system) .................. 251 Home screen ....................................... 249 Operating ............................................. 251 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 252 Settings ............................................... 281 Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display .. 220 Display content Displaying ............................................ Display message ..................................... Calling up (on-board computer) ........... Notes .................................................. Display messages ¯ - - - mph ..................................... ç - - - mph ..................................... # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual ................................................ b Active Headlamps Inoperative .... é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ............................................................. é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! .................................................. b Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative .......................................... û Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel ............................ $ Check Brake Fluid Level ............. 219 468 468 468 500 499 506 475 493 493 475 479 491 # Check Brake Pads See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ + Check Coolant Level See Oper‐ ator's Manual ....................................... 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) ................................................... b Check Left Low Beam (exam‐ ple) ...................................................... h Check Tires ................................ ¥ Check Washer Fluid ................... ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off .................................... _ Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted ................................... ç Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty ....................................... ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... 492 481 513 474 509 480 481 498 497 501 502 Index 539 Á Don't Forget Your Key ................. 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured ............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi‐ cle Turn Engine Off ............................... 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine ................................ 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level ........ 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) ............................. æ Fuel Level Low ............................ æ Gas Cap Loose ........................... ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ T Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ G Inoperative ................................. b Intell. Light System Inoperative .. 474 515 514 514 513 469 482 482 502 503 504 506 476 Á Key Not Detected (red display message) ............................................. Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐ play message) ...................................... 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐ function Service Required (example) ... ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph ..................................................... b Malfunction See Operator’s Manual ................................................. Á Obtain a New Key ....................... ç Off .............................................. ë Off .............................................. F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual ................................................ h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... F Please Release Parking Brake .... Á Replace Key Battery ................... # See Operator's Manual .............. 473 473 470 493 475 472 499 498 487 510 490 473 506 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required .............................................. Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐ ual ....................................................... Ù Steering Malfunction See Oper‐ ator's Manual ....................................... Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual .... # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐ ning ..................................................... # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual ................................................ ç Suspended ................................. b Switch Off Lights ........................ b Switch On Headlamps ................ d Trans. Oil Overheated Drive on with Care ............................................. F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake ................................ 469 477 478 478 507 507 499 476 475 485 491 540 Index d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. h Warning Tire Malfunction ............ h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ rently Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual ....................................................... Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual .................. Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Active Distance Assist Inoperative ...... Active Distance Assist Now Available ............................................................. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 477 510 509 496 496 504 505 499 499 500 495 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive ...................................................... Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Active Steering Assist Inoperative ....... Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐ gency Stops ......................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐ tive ....................................................... Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Operator's Manual .............. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 495 496 493 494 495 476 476 483 483 486 484 Beginning Emergency Stop .................. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual .................. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... Check Tire Pressure Soon .................... Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator ................................. Cruise Control Inoperative .................. Cruise Control Off ............................... Decrease Speed ................................... Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual ............................... Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual ............................... Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning ................................................. Mercedes me connect Services Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual .................. 494 495 495 511 512 500 500 511 483 470 471 476 505 Index 541 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away .................................................... Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ tionary ................................................. Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Park‐ ing Brake ............................................. Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual ........................ PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual ........................................ Reversing Not Possible Service Required .............................................. Run Flat Indicator Inoperative .............. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer .......................................... Teaching in Transmission Complete .... Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ................ 484 483 485 474 472 484 512 484 486 485 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable .......................................... Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ........... Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors .................................... Tires Overheated .................................. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine .................................. To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ onds or press 3 times. ......................... Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ able See Operator's Manual ................ Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ............. Transmission Malfunction .................... Transmission Malfunction Service Required .............................................. Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... Display on the windshield see Head-up Display 508 508 508 511 483 482 496 496 485 486 484 Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Distance recorder see Trip distance DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Child safety lock (rear door) ................... 61 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 Opening (from the inside) ...................... 69 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 72 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 69 Door control panel ..................................... 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 436 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving ................................ 134 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive Away Assist .................................... 204 Drive position Inserting .............................................. 144 542 Index Drive program display ............................. Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat see Seat Driving lights see Automatic driving lights Driving safety system ............................. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... Active Brake Assist .............................. Adaptive brake lights ........................... BAS (Brake Assist System) ................... EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ..................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist ........................ Overview ............................................. Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. Responsibility ...................................... STEER CONTROL ................................. Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment .......................................... Driving system see 360° Camera 140 159 161 164 170 161 164 164 160 159 159 164 187 see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Start-off assist see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Drinking and driving ............................ 134 General driving tips ............................. 134 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 134 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... Configuring drive program I ................. Displaying engine data ......................... Displaying vehicle data ........................ Drive program display .......................... Drive programs .................................... Function .............................................. Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) ............................................................. Selecting the drive program ................ DYNAMIC SELECT switch Damping adjustment ........................... 139 141 141 141 140 139 139 140 140 187 E E10 ............................................................ 461 Easy entry feature Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97 Easy exit feature Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) Function/notes ................................... 164 Index 543 ECO display Function .............................................. 139 Resetting ............................................. 223 ECO start/stop function ......................... 137 Automatic engine start ........................ 137 Automatic engine stop ......................... 137 Method of operation ............................ 137 Switching off/on ................................. 138 Electric parking brake ............................. 156 Applying automatically ........................ 156 Applying or releasing manually ............ 157 Emergency braking .............................. 158 Releasing automatically ....................... 157 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided) ........................ 401 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Reflective safety vest .......................... 400 Removing the warning triangle ............ 401 Setting up the warning triangle ............ 401 Emergency braking ................................. 158 Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call system see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start .......................... 418 Emergency key Locking a door ....................................... 72 Unlocking a door ................................... 72 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle ............................. 132 Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside) ............................ 76 Emergency spare wheel ......................... 452 Inflating ............................................... 453 Notes .................................................. 452 Removing ............................................ 453 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation .............................................. 34 Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 137 Engine number .................................... 458 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 132 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 133 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 131 Starting assistance .............................. Switching off (start/stop button) ........ Engine data Displaying ............................................ Engine number ........................................ Engine oil ................................................. Additives ............................................. Capacity .............................................. Checking the oil level using the onboard computer ................................... MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... Quality ................................................. Topping up ........................................... Entering characters ................................. Function/notes .................................... On the touchscreen (media display) .... Setting the keyboard ........................... ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist ................................. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ....... Activating/deactivating ....................... 411 150 141 458 388 462 463 387 463 463 388 274 274 278 281 164 161 163 544 Index Function/notes .................................... 161 Exterior lighting Care .................................................... 396 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors ............................... 122, 123 Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................ 123 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 125 Folding in/out ..................................... 122 Operating the memory function ............. 97 Parking position ................................... 124 Setting ................................................. 122 F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Favorites Adding ................................................. Adding a destination ........................... Calling up ............................................ Deleting ............................................... Home address ..................................... Moving ................................................ Overview ............................................. 268 298 268 269 298 269 268 Renaming ............................................ 269 Work address ...................................... 298 First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 401 Flat tire ..................................................... 402 Changing a wheel ................................ 447 MOExtended tires ................................ 402 Notes .................................................. 402 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 403 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats ................................................. 111 Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 159 Free software ............................................. 31 Frequencies Mobile phone ...................................... 457 Two-way radio ...................................... 457 Frequency band Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 225 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 40 Front passenger seat see Seat Fuel ........................................................... Additives ............................................. E10 ...................................................... Fuel reserve ........................................ Gasoline ............................................... Quality (gasoline) ................................. Refueling ............................................. Sulfur content ...................................... Tank content ....................................... Fuel consumption On-board computer ............................. Fuel consumption indicator Calling up ............................................. Function seat see Door control panel Fuses ......................................................... Before replacing a fuse ........................ Fuse assignment diagram .................... Fuse box in the engine compartment ... Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ well ...................................................... Fuse box in the trunk ........................... Notes ................................................... 462 462 461 462 461 461 148 461 462 222 141 418 418 418 419 420 421 418 Index 545 Fuses see Fuses G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ........................... 154 Opening or closing the door ................ 154 Programming buttons .......................... 151 Radio equipment approval numbers .... 154 Resolving problems ............................. 153 Synchronizing the rolling code ............. 153 Gas station search Starting automatic search ................... 306 Switching automatic search on/off ..... 306 Gasoline .................................................... 461 Gearshift recommendation .................... 145 Genuine parts ............................................ 21 Glide mode ............................................... 145 Global search Function .............................................. 272 Overview ............................................. 272 Glove box Locking/unlocking .............................. 100 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 422 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 75 Hazard warning lights ............................. 115 Hazardous substances Information ............................................ 24 Head restraint Front (adjusting mechanically) ............... 91 Rear (installing/removing) ..................... 92 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting) ............................................. 92 Head-up Display ...................................... 227 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 227 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ 227 Function .............................................. 228 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 227 Operating the memory function ............. 97 Setting the position (on-board com‐ puter) .................................................. 227 Switching on/off ................................. Headliner (care) ....................................... High beam Switching on/off .................................. High-beam flasher ................................... High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... Hill start assist ........................................ HOLD function ......................................... Function/notes ................................... Switching on/off ................................. Home screen (media display) Overview ............................................. Hood Opening/closing ................................. Hotspot Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 228 397 114 114 116 185 185 185 186 249 385 285 I Identification plate Engine ................................................. 458 Refrigerant .......................................... 465 546 Index Vehicle ................................................ 458 Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 130 Ignition key see SmartKey Immobilizer ................................................ 85 Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program Configuring .......................................... 141 Selecting ............................................. 140 Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster see Instrument Display Instrument cluster lighting .................... 221 Instrument Display .................................. 215 Adjusting the lighting ........................... 221 Function/notes .................................... 215 Instrument cluster ................................. 10 Warning/indicator lamps ..................... 515 Intelligent Light System Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 116 Cornering light function ....................... 116 Interior lighting ........................................ 118 Ambient lighting ................................... 118 Reading light ........................................ 118 Setting ................................................. 118 Switch-off delay time ........................... 119 Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating ......................... 88 Function ................................................ 87 Intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate destinations ........................................ 305 Entering ............................................... 304 Modifying ............................................ 304 Starting an automatic gas station search ................................................. 306 Starting the automatic service sta‐ tion search .......................................... 307 Internet Calling up a web page ......................... 360 Closing the browser ............................ 362 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 362 Deleting history ................................... Managing bookmarks .......................... Internet connection Communication module function ........ Connection status ............................... Displaying the connection status ........ Establishing ......................................... Information .......................................... Restrictions ......................................... iPhone® see Apple CarPlay® see Mercedes-Benz Link 362 362 359 359 360 359 358 358 J Jack Storage location .................................. 446 Jump-start connection ............................. 411 General notes ...................................... 409 K KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 Problem ................................................. 71 Unlocking setting .................................. 65 Index 547 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69 Kickdown ................................................. 145 Using ................................................... 145 Knee airbag ................................................ 40 L Labeling (tires) see Tire labeling Lamp see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display) see Warning/indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language ................................................. 286 Notes .................................................. 286 Setting ................................................. 286 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur‐ ing system Installing ................................................ 54 Light switch Overview .............................................. Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights ........................................................ Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... Adjusting the instrument lighting ......... Automatic driving lights ....................... Combination switch ............................. Cornering light function ....................... Hazard warning lights .......................... High beam ........................................... High-beam flasher ................................ Light switch ......................................... Low-beam headlamps .......................... Parking lights ....................................... Rear fog lamp ....................................... Responsibility for lighting systems ....... Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time ....................................... Standing lights ..................................... Switching the surround lighting on/off .................................................. Turn signals .......................................... 113 113 116 221 114 114 116 115 114 114 113 113 113 113 113 117 113 118 114 Limited Warranty Vehicle .................................................. 28 Live Traffic Information Displaying the traffic map .................... 316 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 317 Provider information ............................ 316 Showing local area messages .............. 318 Switching the traffic information dis‐ play on ................................................. 317 Load index (tires) .................................... 438 Load-bearing capacity (tires) ................. 438 Loading ..................................................... 104 Cargo tie-down rings ........................... 104 Definitions ........................................... 440 Notes ..................................................... 99 Roof carrier ......................................... 104 Stowage space under the trunk floor ... 104 Loading guidelines .................................... 99 Loading information table ...................... 431 Loads Securing ................................................ 99 548 Index Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto‐ matic locking feature ............................. 71 Emergency key ...................................... 72 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 69 Unlocking and opening doors from the inside .............................................. 69 Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off .................................. 113 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Securing ................................................ 99 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 91 M Maintenance Menu (on-board computer) .................. 221 Vehicle .................................................. 23 Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................ 190 Restraint system ................................... 34 Malfunction message see Display message Map ................................................... 316, 319 Avoiding an area .................................. 323 Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 323 Changing an area ................................ 323 Deleting an area .................................. 324 Displaying the compass ....................... 325 Displaying the map version ................. 322 Displaying the next intersecting street ................................................... 322 Displaying the range ............................ 326 Displaying the satellite map ................ 325 Displaying the traffic map .................... 316 Displaying weather information ........... 326 Map data ............................................. 324 Moving ................................................ 320 Selecting POI symbols ......................... 321 Selecting text information ................... 322 Selecting the map orientation ............. 320 Setting the map scale .......................... 319 Setting the map scale automatically .... 325 Showing in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster ..................... 326 Switching freeway information on/off ................................................. 322 Updating .............................................. 324 Massage program Resetting the settings ............................ 93 Massage programs Selecting the front seats ....................... 93 Massage settings Resetting ............................................... 93 Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 393 Maximum load rating .............................. 437 Maximum permissible load Calculation example ............................ 433 Determining ........................................ 432 Maximum tire pressure .......................... 437 MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) .................................................... 255 Notes ................................................... 254 Operating a function with the favor‐ ites pose .............................................. 258 Index 549 Operating functions through proxim‐ ity of the hand ..................................... 256 Overview ............................................. 255 Selecting settings ................................ 260 Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off ....... 259 Switching the search light for the driver on/off ....................................... 259 Mechanical key Inserting/removing ............................... 66 Media Menu (on-board computer) .................. 225 Media display Notes ................................................... 248 Media mode Adding a favorite song ......................... 371 Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐ ment .................................................... 369 Connecting USB devices ..................... 369 Controlling media playback ................. 370 Copyright and trademarks ................... 366 Notes about the search function in categories ............................................ 371 Overview of the media menu ............... 368 Playing back similar music tracks ........ 371 Removing a favorite song ..................... 371 Starting a search in categories ............ 371 Starting media playback ...................... 370 Supported format and data storage media .................................................. 365 Surprise mix ........................................ 371 Using the keyword search ................... 372 Media playback Operating (on-board computer) ........... 225 Media source Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 225 Memory function Head-up Display — Calling up stored settings .................................................. 97 Head-up Display — Storing settings ....... 97 Operating .............................................. 97 Outside mirrors — Calling up stored settings .................................................. 97 Outside mirrors — Storing settings ........ 97 Seat — Calling up stored settings ........... 97 Seat — Storing settings .......................... 97 Menu (on-board computer) Assistance ........................................... 221 Designs ................................................ Head-up Display .................................. Maintenance ........................................ Media .................................................. Navigation ........................................... Overview .............................................. Radio ................................................... Telephone ............................................ Trip ...................................................... Mercedes me app Calling up services .............................. Calling up your user account ............... Deleting the connection to the user account ............................................... Information .......................................... Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment ........ Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center ................................................. Information .......................................... Making a call via the overhead con‐ trol panel ............................................. Transferred data .................................. 218 227 221 225 223 217 225 226 222 355 354 355 354 352 352 351 351 352 550 Index Mercedes me connect Accident and breakdown manage‐ ment .................................................... Information .......................................... Transferred data .................................. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes ................................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐ tem ........................................................... Automatic emergency call ................... Information .......................................... Information on data transfer ................ Manual emergency call ........................ Overview ............................................. Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ Connecting .......................................... Ending ................................................. Note .................................................... Overview ............................................. Sound settings .................................... Message (multifunction display) see Display message Message memory .................................... 354 353 354 130 355 356 355 357 357 356 345 346 346 345 345 346 468 Messages ................................................. Calling a message sender .................... Composing .......................................... Configuring the displayed text mes‐ sages ................................................... Deleting ............................................... Forwarding .......................................... Overview ............................................. Reading ............................................... Replying .............................................. Sending ............................................... Using a number/URL .......................... Using templates .................................. Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ..................................................... Mirrors see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... Frequencies ......................................... Transmission output (maximum) ......... Wireless charging ................................. Mobile phone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay® 342 344 343 343 345 344 342 343 343 343 344 344 242 158 457 457 111 see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone Mobile phone voice recognition Starting ............................................... Stopping .............................................. Model series see Vehicle identification plate MOExtended tires ................................... Multifunction display Overview of displays ............................ Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons ............................. Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel Multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... Adjusting the volume ........................... Central control elements ..................... Configuring display settings ................ Configuring drive program I ................. Favorites ............................................. Main functions .................................... 337 337 402 220 216 159 274 250 281 141 268 260 Index 551 MBUX Interior Assistant (notes) .......... Overview .............................................. Restoring the factory settings ............. Standby mode function ....................... Switching the sound on/off ................. Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see Entering characters see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi‐ media system) see Notifications Center see Profile see Suggestions see Themes see Touch Control see Touchpad N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) .................. Overview .............................................. Showing/hiding the menu ................... Switching on ....................................... Updating the map data ........................ 254 247 290 159 273 223 291 290 290 324 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ..................................................... Navigation see Destination see Destination entry see Map see Parking service see Route see Route guidance see Traffic information Navigation announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... Adjusting the volume ........................... Repeating ............................................ Switching audio fadeout on/off ........... Navigation messages On-board computer ............................. Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... Connecting the mobile phone to the multimedia system .............................. General information ............................ Switching mobile phones .................... Using a mobile phone .......................... 235 312 312 313 312 223 335 335 335 335 335 Neutral Inserting .............................................. NFC see Near Field Communication (NFC) Non-operational time Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... Standby mode function ....................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....... Notifications Center ................................ Calling up a notification ....................... Editing a notification ............................ Global search (overview) ..................... Notification types ................................ Overview ............................................. Selecting actions for a notification ...... Using the global search ....................... 143 159 159 134 270 271 271 272 270 270 271 272 O Occupant safety Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62 Occupant safety see Airbag 552 Index see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Odometer see Total distance Oil see Engine oil On-board computer ................................. Assistance menu ................................. Displaying the service due date ........... Head-up Display menu ........................ Media menu ........................................ Menu designs ...................................... Menu overview ..................................... Multifunction display ........................... Navigation system menu ..................... Operating ............................................. Radio menu ......................................... Service menu ....................................... 217 221 384 227 225 218 217 220 223 217 225 221 Telephone menu .................................. 226 Trip menu ............................................ 222 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection Online services Data storage .......................................... 30 Open-source software ............................... 31 Opening the trunk lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 75 Operating fluids Additives (fuel) .................................... 462 Brake fluid ........................................... 463 Coolant (engine) .................................. 464 Engine oil ............................................ 462 Fuel (gasoline) ..................................... 461 Notes .................................................. 459 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 465 Windshield washer fluid ....................... 464 Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 25 Information ............................................ 24 Operating system see On-board computer Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 22 Operator's Manual (digital) ...................... 20 Overhead control panel Overview ................................................ 14 P Paint code ................................................ 458 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 393 Panic alarm ................................................ 65 Activating/deactivating ......................... 65 Panoramic sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Park position Inserting .............................................. 143 Selecting automatically ....................... 143 Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Index 553 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. Activating ............................................ Adjusting warning tones ...................... Function .............................................. Problems ............................................. Side impact protection ......................... Switching off ....................................... System limitations ............................... Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking for an extended period .............. Parking lights ........................................... Parking options see Parking service Parking position Exterior mirrors .................................... Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear ......................................... Parking service ........................................ Notes ................................................... 188 192 193 188 190 191 192 188 158 113 124 124 327 327 Selecting parking options .................... 327 Showing a parking option on the map ..................................................... 328 PARKTRONIC Malfunction ......................................... 190 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Payload Calculation example ............................ 433 Determining the maximum .................. 432 Permitted towing methods ..................... 413 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 62 Phone book see Contacts PIN protection Activating/deactivating ....................... 287 Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 397 POI Quick access ........................................ 311 Selecting ............................................. 295 POI symbols Selecting ............................................. 321 Power supply Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 130 Power washer (care) ............................... 391 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 47 Function ................................................ 47 PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 47 Reversing measures .............................. 48 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection plus) ................................ 48 Function ................................................ 48 Reversing measures .............................. 48 Preventative occupant protection sys‐ tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) Previous destinations Selecting ............................................. 295 Profile ....................................................... 261 Creating a new profile ......................... 262 Maximum number of profiles ............... 261 554 Index Notes ................................................... 261 Overview .............................................. 261 Selecting a profile ............................... 263 Selecting profile options ..................... 263 Showing the profile selection when entering ............................................... 264 Synchronizing ...................................... 263 Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protecting the environment Notes ..................................................... 21 Protection against collision see Drive Away Assist Protection against theft see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Q QR code Rescue card .......................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ................. 26 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage ............................................... Radio Activating ............................................ Activating/deactivating radio text ....... Calling up the station list ..................... Deleting stations ................................. Direct frequency entry ......................... Displaying information ......................... Displaying radio text ............................ Editing station presets ......................... Menu (on-board computer) .................. Moving stations ................................... Overview ............................................. Searching for stations .......................... Setting a channel ................................. Setting the waveband .......................... Showing accident reports .................... Storing radio stations .......................... Switching the HD Radio function on/off .................................................. Radio stations Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 159 372 375 374 375 374 375 375 375 225 375 373 374 374 374 375 374 374 225 Rain closing function Sliding sunroof ...................................... 83 Range Displaying ............................................ 222 Reading light Switching on/off using poses ............. 259 Reading light see Interior lighting Real wood (Care) ..................................... 397 Rear door (child safety lock) ..................... 61 Rear fog lamp Switching on/off .................................. 114 Rear seat see Seat Rear view camera .................................... 193 Care .................................................... 396 Function .............................................. 193 Opening the camera cover (360° Camera) ............................................... 199 Reflective safety vest ............................. 400 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes .................................................. 465 Index 555 Refueling Refueling the vehicle ........................... 148 Remote Online Charging the battery ............................ 133 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐ rior ....................................................... 133 Starting the vehicle ............................. 133 Reporting safety defects .......................... 27 Rescue card ............................................... 28 Reserve Fuel ..................................................... 462 Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 290 Residual heat ........................................... 128 Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system ....................................... 33 Basic instructions for children ............... 48 Function in an accident ......................... 34 Functionality .......................................... 34 Malfunction ........................................... 34 Protection .............................................. 33 Reduced protection ............................... 33 Self-test ................................................. 34 Warning lamp ........................................ 34 Reverse gear Inserting .............................................. 143 Rims (Care) .............................................. 396 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .......... 23 Roll away protection see HOLD function Roof carrier Attaching ............................................. 104 Loading ............................................... 104 Roof load .................................................. 467 Route ................................................ 299, 305 Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt ..................................... 302 Activating a commuter route ............... 306 Alternative route (quick-access) ........... 311 Calculating .......................................... 299 Displaying destination information ...... 304 Displaying the route list ....................... 305 Editing a stored route .......................... 308 External ............................................... 315 Planning .............................................. 304 Recording a route ................................ 307 Saving a recorded route ...................... Selecting a type ................................... Selecting an alternative route ............. Selecting notifications ......................... Selecting options ................................ Showing a stored route on the map ..... Starting a saved route ......................... Starting the automatic service sta‐ tion search .......................................... Switching the automatic gas station search on/off ...................................... With intermediate destinations ........... Route guidance ....................................... Canceling ............................................. Changing direction .............................. Destination reached ............................. Freeway information ............................. From an off-road location .................... Lane recommendations ....................... Notes .................................................. Off-road ............................................... To an off-road destination .................... Route-based speed adaptation Displays in the Instrument Display ...... Function ............................................... 308 301 305 303 302 307 307 307 306 305 308 313 309 312 311 313 310 308 314 313 183 178 556 Index Route-based speed adjustment Setting ................................................. 179 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires ................................ 402 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Satellite map ........................................... Satellite radio Activating/deactivating TuneStart ....... Adding a channel to Smart Favorites ... Deleting a channel ............................... Displaying EPG information ................. Displaying service information ............ Information .......................................... Information about Smart Favorites and TuneStart ...................................... Logging in ............................................ Moving a channel ................................ Music and sport alerts function ........... Overview ............................................. Pause and playback function ............... Restrictions ......................................... 325 380 379 378 378 380 375 379 376 378 378 377 380 375 Selecting a category ............................ 377 Selecting a channel ............................. 378 Setting music and sport alerts ............ 378 Setting the parental control ................. 378 Storing a channel ................................. 378 Switching on ........................................ 376 Search light Switching on/off using poses ............. 259 Seat ..................................................... 89, 101 4-way lumbar support ............................ 91 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 90 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 90 Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 103 Configuring the settings ........................ 93 Correct driver's seat position ................ 89 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back ............................. 102 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 101 Operating the memory function ............. 97 Resetting the settings ............................ 93 Setting options ...................................... 16 Seat belt ..................................................... 35 Fastening ............................................... 38 Protection .............................................. 35 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 39 Function ................................................ 39 Seat belt warning see Seat belts Seat belts ................................................... 39 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 39 Care .................................................... 397 Reduced protection ............................... 37 Releasing ............................................... 39 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 39 Warning lamp ........................................ 39 Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 397 Seat heating Activating/deactivating ......................... 93 Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating ......................... 94 Second telephone Connecting .......................................... 334 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Index 557 Selecting the sound profile Burmester® surround sound system ... 382 Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff ............................................ 45 Sensors (Care) ......................................... 396 Service center see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Service station search Starting automatic search ................... 307 Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the date format .......................... 282 Setting the distance unit ........................ 286 Setting the map scale see Map Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation .................. 145 Short messages see Messages Side airbag ................................................. 40 Side impact protection ............................ 191 Side windows ............................................. 77 Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment ....................... 62 Closing .................................................. 77 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 79 Convenience closing feature ................. 79 Convenience opening ............................ 78 Opening ................................................. 77 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 78 Problem ................................................. 79 Size designation (tires) ........................... 438 Sliding sunroof ........................................... 81 Automatic functions .............................. 83 Closing .................................................. 81 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 79 Opening ................................................. 81 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 78 Problem ................................................. 84 Rain closing function ............................. 83 SmartKey ................................................... 64 Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 65 Battery .................................................. 66 Energy consumption .............................. 66 Features ................................................ 64 Key ring attachment .............................. 66 Mechanical key ...................................... 66 Overview ............................................... 64 Panic alarm ........................................... 65 Problem ................................................. 68 Unlocking setting .................................. 65 SmartKey functions Deactivating .......................................... 66 Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay® see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone Snow chains ............................................ 423 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 108 Front center console ........................... 108 Trunk ................................................... 109 558 Index Socket (115 V) .......................................... 108 Rear passenger compartment ............. 108 Software update ...................................... 288 Information .......................................... 288 Performing .......................................... 289 System updates ................................... 289 Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 47 Wheels and tires .................................. 422 Sound see Burmester® surround sound system see Sound settings Sound settings ........................................ 380 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 381 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 380 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 380 Calls up the sound menu ..................... 380 Information .......................................... 380 Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Special seat belt retractor ........................ 54 Specialist workshop .................................. 26 Speech dialog system see Voice Control System Speed index (tires) .................................. Speedometer Digital .................................................. Standby mode Activating/deactivating ....................... Function .............................................. Standing lights ......................................... Start-off assist ......................................... Activating ............................................ Function .............................................. Start/Stop button Parking the vehicle .............................. Starting the vehicle .............................. Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting the engine see Vehicle 438 222 159 159 113 187 187 187 150 131 130 Starting-off aid see Hill start assist Station Deleting ............................................... 375 Direct frequency entry ......................... 374 Moving ................................................. 375 Searching ............................................. 374 Setting ................................................. 374 Storing ................................................. 374 Station list Calling up ............................................. 374 Station presets Modifying ............................................. 375 STEER CONTROL Function/notes ................................... 164 Steering wheel ......................................... 216 Adjusting (manually) .............................. 95 Buttons ................................................ 216 Steering wheel heater ........................... 96 Steering wheel heater Switching on/off ................................... 96 Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. 144 Index 559 Stowage areas see Loading see Stowage compartment Stowage compartment ........................... Armrest ............................................... Center console .................................... Door .................................................... Glove box ............................................. Stowage compartment in the glove box Opening ............................................... Stowage compartments see Loading see Stowage compartment Stowage space under the trunk floor .... Suggestions ............................................. Calling up ............................................ Configuring .......................................... Deleting ............................................... Overview ............................................. Renaming ............................................ Sulfur content .......................................... 100 100 100 100 100 101 104 266 267 267 268 266 268 461 Sun visor Operating ............................................ Surround lighting Switching on/off .................................. Surround View see 360° Camera Suspension Adaptive damping adjustment ............. Damping characteristics ...................... Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ Interior ................................................. Switching volume adjustment on/off Advanced sound system ...................... Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ Switching on/off (control panel) ......... System settings Activating/deactivating PIN protec‐ tion ...................................................... Reset function (multimedia system) .... Setting the distance unit ..................... 125 118 187 187 117 119 382 128 128 287 290 286 Setting the time and date automati‐ cally ..................................................... 282 Setting the time zone .......................... 282 Setting the time/date format .............. 282 System settings see Bluetooth® see Data import/export see Language see Software update see Wi-Fi T Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 396 Tank content Fuel ..................................................... 462 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 462 Technical data Information .......................................... 456 Vehicle identification plate .................. 458 Telephone ........................................ 226, 332 Activating functions during a call ......... 337 Calls with several participants ............. 337 Changing a function ............................ 334 560 Index Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ............... Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ key) ..................................................... Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) .................................... Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ Importing contacts .............................. Importing contacts (overview) ............. Incoming call during an existing call .... Information .......................................... Interchanging mobile phones .............. Menu (on-board computer) .................. Mobile phone voice recognition ........... Notes .................................................. Operating modes ................................. Reception and transmission volume .... Replacing mobile phones .................... Setting the ringtone ............................ Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ........................ Telephone menu overview ................... Telephone operation ............................ Using Near Field Communication (NFC) ................................................... 335 333 333 335 340 339 338 333 334 226 337 330 333 336 334 336 335 332 337 335 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ..................................................... Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ Telephone number Dialing (on-board computer) ................ Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony .......................... Temperature grade .................................. Text messages Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ..................................................... Text messages see Messages Themes ..................................................... Calling up ............................................ Deleting ............................................... Fastening ............................................. Modifying ............................................ Moving ................................................ Overview ............................................. Through-loading feature see Seat 238 111 226 333 435 242 264 265 266 265 266 266 264 Time Manual time setting ............................. Setting the time and date automati‐ cally ..................................................... Setting the time zone .......................... Setting the time/date format .............. TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............ Tire and Loading Information placard ... Tire characteristics ................................. Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tire information table ............................. Tire labeling ............................................. Characteristics .................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. Load index ........................................... Load-bearing capacity ......................... Maximum tire load ............................... Maximum tire pressure ....................... Overview ............................................. Speed rating ........................................ Temperature grade .............................. Tire Quality Grading ............................. 282 282 282 282 436 431 438 431 435 438 436 438 438 437 437 435 438 435 435 Index 561 Tire size designation ............................ 438 Traction grade ..................................... 435 Tread wear grade ................................. 435 Tire load (maximum) ............................... 437 Tire pressure ................................... 425, 426 Checking (manually) ............................ 426 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 428 Maximum ............................................ 437 Notes ................................................... 424 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 430 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 429 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. 429 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 427 Tire pressure table .............................. 425 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 403 Tire pressure loss warning system Function .............................................. 429 Restarting ............................................ 430 Tire pressure monitor ............................. Function .............................................. Restarting ............................................ Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure .................. Tire pressure table .................................. Tire Quality Grading ................................ Tire temperature Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. Tire tread ................................................. Tire-change tool kit Overview ............................................. TIREFIT kit ................................................ Storage location .................................. Using ................................................... Tires Changing hub caps .............................. Characteristics .................................... Checking ............................................. Checking the tire pressure (man‐ ually) ................................................... 429 427 429 428 425 435 427 422 446 403 403 403 447 438 422 426 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system) ...................... 428 Definitions ........................................... 440 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 436 Flat tire ................................................ 402 Installing .............................................. 450 Load index ........................................... 438 Load-bearing capacity ......................... 438 Maximum tire load ............................... 437 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 437 MOExtended tires ................................ 402 Noise ................................................... 422 Notes on installing .............................. 443 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 435 Removing ............................................ 450 Replacing .................................... 443, 447 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 430 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 429 Rotating ............................................... 445 Selection ............................................. 443 Snow chains ........................................ 423 Speed rating ........................................ 438 Storing ................................................ 446 562 Index Temperature grade .............................. Tire and Loading Information placard .. Tire pressure (notes) ........................... Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. Tire pressure table .............................. Tire Quality Grading ............................. Tire size designation ............................ TIREFIT kit ........................................... Traction grade ..................................... Tread wear grade ................................. Unusual handling characteristics ........ Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................................. Total distance .......................................... Displaying ............................................ Touch Control .......................................... On-board computer .............................. Operating ............................................ Setting acoustic operating feedback ... Setting the sensitivity .......................... 435 431 424 429 427 425 435 438 403 435 435 422 56 222 222 250 217 250 251 251 Touchpad .................................................. 252 Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐ ating feedback ..................................... 254 Operating ............................................ 252 Reading the handwriting recognition aloud ................................................... 253 Selecting a station and track ............... 254 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 254 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 253 Touchscreen (media display) Entering characters ............................. 278 Operating ............................................. 251 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 252 Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating ......................... 87 Function ................................................ 87 Tow-bar system ........................................ 214 Tow-starting ............................................. 418 Towing away ............................................. 414 Towing eye Installing .............................................. 417 Storage location ................................... 417 Towing methods ....................................... 413 Traction grade ......................................... Traffic information ................................... Car-to-X-Communication ..................... Displaying the traffic map .................... Displaying traffic incidents .................. Live Traffic Information ........................ Overview .............................................. Switching on the display ...................... Traffic map see Map Traffic Sign Assist ................................... Function/notes ................................... Setting ................................................. System limitations ............................... Transferred vehicle data Android Auto ....................................... Apple CarPlay® .................................... Transmission (problem) .......................... Transmission position display ................ Transporting Vehicle ................................................. Tread wear grade ..................................... Trim element (Care) ................................. 435 315 318 316 317 316 315 317 207 207 208 207 350 350 147 142 416 435 397 Index 563 Trip Menu (on-board computer) .................. 222 Trip computer Displaying ............................................ 222 Resetting ............................................. 223 Trip distance ............................................ 222 Displaying ............................................ 222 Resetting ............................................. 223 Trip odometer see Trip distance Trunk lid Closing ................................................... 74 Emergency release (from inside) ............ 76 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 75 Opening ................................................. 73 Opening dimensions ............................ 466 TuneIn Calling up ............................................ 362 Calling up the station list (category last selected) ....................................... 365 Deleting stations ................................. 365 Logging out ......................................... 365 Overview ............................................. 364 Registering .......................................... 365 Saving stations .................................... Selecting and connecting to a station ............................................................. Selecting stream ................................. Setting options .................................... Terms of use ........................................ TuneMix Creating a list ...................................... Turn signal indicator see Turn signals Turn signals .............................................. Switching on/off .................................. Two-way radios Frequencies ......................................... Notes on installation ........................... Transmission output (maximum) ......... 365 364 365 365 365 379 114 114 457 456 457 U Units of measurement Setting ................................................. 286 Unlocking setting ...................................... 65 USB port ................................................... 109 User profile see Profile Using the telephone see Calls V Vehicle ...................................................... 132 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 159 Correct use ........................................... 27 Damage detection (parking) ................ 158 Data acquisition .................................... 28 Data storage .......................................... 28 Diagnostics connection ......................... 26 Equipment ............................................. 22 Limited Warranty ................................... 28 Locking (automatically) .......................... 71 Locking (from the inside) ....................... 69 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 69 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 72 Lowering .............................................. 451 Maintenance ......................................... 23 Parking for an extended period ............ 158 Problem notification .............................. 27 QR code rescue card ............................. 28 564 Index Qualified specialist workshop ................ 26 Raising ................................................ 448 Standby mode function ....................... 159 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 132 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 133 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 131 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 150 Towing ................................................. 214 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 69 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 69 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 78 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ..................................................... 243 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............. 141 Roof load ............................................. 467 Transferring to Android Auto ............... 350 Transferring to Apple CarPlay® ............ 350 Turning radius ...................................... 466 Vehicle height ...................................... 466 Vehicle length ...................................... 466 Vehicle width ....................................... 466 Wheelbase ........................................... 466 Vehicle data storage Event data recorders ............................. 30 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect ........................................... 30 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 466 Vehicle electronics Notes .................................................. 456 Two-way radios .................................... 456 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .................... 458 Paint code ........................................... 458 VIN ...................................................... 458 Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 133 Vehicle key see SmartKey Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada ................... 23 Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 403 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 403 Towing eye ........................................... 417 Ventilating Convenience opening ............................ 78 Vents see Air vents VIN ............................................................ 458 Engine compartment ........................... 458 Identification plate .............................. 458 Windshield ........................................... 458 Vision Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. 128 Voice Control System ............................. 230 Audible help functions ......................... 232 Improving speech quality .................... 233 Language setting ................................. 231 Media player voice commands ............ 240 Message voice commands .................. 242 Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐ ing) ...................................................... 230 Navigation voice commands ................ 235 Notes on the voice commands ............ 233 Online voice control ............................ 233 Operable functions .............................. 231 Index 565 Operating safety .................................. Setting (multimedia system) ................ Switch voice commands ...................... Telephone voice controls ..................... Text message voice commands ........... Vehicle voice commands ..................... Voice prompting .................................. Voice control system see Voice Control System W Warning lamps see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing ............................................. Setting up ............................................ Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp ...................... $ Brake warning lamp (USA) .......... J Brakes warning lamp (Canada) ... ÿ Coolant warning lamp ................. 229 231 233 238 242 243 230 401 401 525 523 523 519 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp .................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. å ESP® OFF warning lamp ............. ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes ........ ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up ...... æ Fuel reserve warning lamp ......... ! Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (Canada only) ... F Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (USA only) ........ 6 Restraint system warning lamp ... 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp flashes ................... h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp lights up ................. 520 520 527 526 526 521 522 522 517 517 518 528 528 L Warning lamp for distance warning function .................................. 524 Ù Warning lamp for electric power steering ..................................... 518 ! Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is malfunctioning ......... 522 Warning/indicator lamps ........................ Overview .............................................. PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ Warranty .................................................... Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... Water tank see Air-water duct Weather information ............................... Web browser Calling up a web page ......................... Calling up options ................................ Calling up the settings ......................... Deleting a bookmark ........................... Deleting Internet history ...................... 515 515 45 28 392 326 360 361 362 362 362 566 Index Ending ................................................. Managing bookmarks .......................... Overview .............................................. Website Calling up ............................................ Wheel change Lowering the vehicle ............................ Mounting a new wheel ........................ Removing a wheel ............................... Removing/installing hub caps ............. Wheel rotation ......................................... Wheels Care .................................................... Changing hub caps .............................. Checking ............................................. Checking the tire pressure (man‐ ually) ................................................... Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system) ...................... Definitions ........................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. Flat tire ................................................ Installing .............................................. 362 362 361 360 451 450 450 447 445 396 447 422 426 428 440 436 402 450 Load index ........................................... 438 Load-bearing capacity ......................... 438 Maximum tire load ............................... 437 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 437 MOExtended tires ................................ 402 Noise ................................................... 422 Notes on installing .............................. 443 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 435 Removing ............................................ 450 Replacing .................................... 443, 447 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 430 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system ........................................... 429 Rotating ............................................... 445 Selection ............................................. 443 Snow chains ........................................ 423 Speed rating ........................................ 438 Storing ................................................ 446 Temperature grade .............................. 435 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 431 Tire characteristics .............................. 438 Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 424 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. 429 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 427 Tire pressure table .............................. 425 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 435 Tire size designation ............................ 438 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 403 Traction grade ..................................... 435 Tread wear grade ................................. 435 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 422 Wi-Fi ......................................................... 283 Overview ............................................. 283 Setting ................................................. 284 Setting up a hotspot ............................ 285 Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis‐ play Instrument cluster ................................. 12 Window curtain airbag ............................. 40 Windows see Side windows Windows (Care) ....................................... 396 Windshield ............................................... 120 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120 Index 567 Windshield see Windshield Windshield washer fluid ......................... 464 Notes ................................................... 464 Windshield washer system Topping up ........................................... 389 Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating ....................... 120 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120 Winter operation Snow chains ........................................ 423 Wiper blades Care .................................................... 396 Replacing ............................................. 120 Wireless charging Function/notes .................................... 110 Mobile phone ....................................... 111 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ...................... 25 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop